1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
Order Today|Dealer-Direct Buy Prices|Delivered + Installed in 48 States

Buy Commercial Metal Buildings Delivered & Installed Starting From $26,485

Steel And Stud is your trusted commercial metal building dealer and steel building contractor. Order pre-engineered metal buildings for business use in any width and length with pricing starting from $26,485 installed. Request metal building pricing, customize your steel building design, and schedule professional steel building installation across 48 states. Get a free quote, compare commercial building packages, or call 1-877-275-7048 to plan your project today.

$26,485
Starting From
100ft
Clear Span Width
20yr
12ga Frame Warranty
48
States Delivered
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 2521–2560 of 2740 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility | Steel and Stud — From $147,100
12
80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$167,700$147,100SAVE $20,600
or $3065/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Agricultural Processing Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hay storage, grain handling, dairy support, cold storage, equipment parking, feed processing, or wash-down agricultural operations under a heavy-duty galvanized steel structure.

You're viewing:Agricultural Processing Facility·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$147,100$167,700Save $20,600
or as low as $3065/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$117,800
80×100
this size
$147,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $38,500
  • Lean-To Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-AGRICULTURAL-PROBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your manufacturing facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free bays sized for equipment rows. Hay storage, grain handling, dairy support, cold storage, equipment parking, feed processing, or wash-down agricultural operations under a heavy-duty galvanized steel structure.

Main production floorASSEMBLY + QC + MAINTENANCEWarehouse + shipping + offices80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · manufacturing facility

Main production floor · Assembly + QC + maintenance · Warehouse + shipping + offices

Main production floor at the front, assembly + qc + maintenance in the middle, warehouse + shipping + offices at the rear. Capacity: full production ops, ~20 workstations.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: bridge crane, separated finish rooms, office mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Processing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Processing Facility spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Processing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural processing facility
Everyday agricultural processing facility
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural processing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
agricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3065/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 agricultural processing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3065/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Processing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Agricultural Processing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Processing Facility also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Processing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 agricultural processing facility cost?

A 80×100 agricultural processing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $147,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3065/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 agricultural processing facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 agricultural processing facility?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 agricultural processing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 agricultural processing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 agricultural processing facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3065/month on a 80×100 agricultural processing facility.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 agricultural processing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 agricultural processing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×100 agricultural processing facility stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Processing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$147,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility | Steel and Stud — From $147,100
12
80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$167,700$147,100SAVE $20,600
or $3065/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Agricultural Processing Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility, built for farm and ranch demands.

Hay storage, grain handling, dairy support, cold storage, equipment parking, feed processing, or wash-down agricultural operations under a heavy-duty galvanized steel structure.

You're viewing:Agricultural Processing Facility·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$147,100$167,700Save $20,600
or as low as $3065/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$117,800
80×100
this size
$147,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $38,500
  • Lean-To Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-AGRICULTURAL-PROBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your manufacturing facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free bays sized for equipment rows. Hay storage, grain handling, dairy support, cold storage, equipment parking, feed processing, or wash-down agricultural operations under a heavy-duty galvanized steel structure.

Main production floorASSEMBLY + QC + MAINTENANCEWarehouse + shipping + offices80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · manufacturing facility

Main production floor · Assembly + QC + maintenance · Warehouse + shipping + offices

Main production floor at the front, assembly + qc + maintenance in the middle, warehouse + shipping + offices at the rear. Capacity: full production ops, ~20 workstations.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: bridge crane, separated finish rooms, office mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Processing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Processing Facility spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Processing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural processing facility
Everyday agricultural processing facility
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural processing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
agricultural processing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3065/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 agricultural processing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3065/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Processing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Agricultural Processing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Agricultural Processing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Processing Facility also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Processing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 agricultural processing facility cost?

A 80×100 agricultural processing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $147,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3065/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 agricultural processing facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 agricultural processing facility?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural processing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 agricultural processing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 agricultural processing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 agricultural processing facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3065/month on a 80×100 agricultural processing facility.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 agricultural processing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 agricultural processing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×100 agricultural processing facility stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Processing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$147,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Trucking Terminal

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Trucking Terminal | Steel and Stud — From $148,300
12
80×100 Trucking Terminal
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Trucking Terminal
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Trucking Terminal, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Regional cross-dock, service bay, or trucking support facility with dock-ready openings, drive-through access, clear truck routes, and space for a front office partition.

You're viewing:Trucking Terminal·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,000
80×100
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $52,000
  • Drive-Through
  • Dock Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-TRUCKING-TERMINABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Regional cross-dock, service bay, or trucking support facility with dock-ready openings, drive-through access, clear truck routes, and space for a front office partition.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOFFICE MEZZANINE + BREAK + RESTROOMS80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~160 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Trucking Terminal in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Trucking Terminal.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Trucking Terminal spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Trucking Terminal.

DAILY USEEveryday trucking terminal
Everyday trucking terminal
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a trucking terminal.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtrucking terminal + seasonal storage
trucking terminal + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Trucking Terminal — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 trucking terminal is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Trucking Terminal shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Trucking Terminal buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Trucking Terminal

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Trucking Terminal · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Trucking Terminal also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Trucking Terminal questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 trucking terminal cost?

A 80×100 trucking terminal from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 trucking terminal price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud trucking terminal ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 trucking terminal?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud trucking terminal different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 trucking terminal need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 trucking terminal delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 trucking terminal without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 80×100 trucking terminal.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 trucking terminal?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 trucking terminal in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×100 trucking terminal meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Trucking Terminal quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Trucking Terminal

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Trucking Terminal | Steel and Stud — From $148,300
12
80×100 Trucking Terminal
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Trucking Terminal
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Trucking Terminal, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Regional cross-dock, service bay, or trucking support facility with dock-ready openings, drive-through access, clear truck routes, and space for a front office partition.

You're viewing:Trucking Terminal·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,000
80×100
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $52,000
  • Drive-Through
  • Dock Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-TRUCKING-TERMINABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Regional cross-dock, service bay, or trucking support facility with dock-ready openings, drive-through access, clear truck routes, and space for a front office partition.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOFFICE MEZZANINE + BREAK + RESTROOMS80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~160 pallet positions, full forklift ops.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Trucking Terminal in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Trucking Terminal.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Trucking Terminal spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Trucking Terminal.

DAILY USEEveryday trucking terminal
Everyday trucking terminal
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a trucking terminal.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtrucking terminal + seasonal storage
trucking terminal + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Trucking Terminal — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 trucking terminal is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Trucking Terminal shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Trucking Terminal buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Trucking Terminal

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Trucking Terminal · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Trucking Terminal also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Trucking Terminal questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 trucking terminal cost?

A 80×100 trucking terminal from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 trucking terminal price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud trucking terminal ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 trucking terminal?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud trucking terminal different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 trucking terminal need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 trucking terminal delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 trucking terminal without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 80×100 trucking terminal.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 trucking terminal?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 trucking terminal in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×100 trucking terminal meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Trucking Terminal quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud — From $148,700
12
80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,500$148,700SAVE $20,800
or $3098/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Warehouse / Inventory Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

8,000 sq ft high-bay warehouse for pallet racking, bulk inventory, parts storage, contractor supplies, or distribution staging. Clear-span width keeps forklift routes open.

You're viewing:Warehouse / Inventory Storage·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,700$169,500Save $20,800
or as low as $3098/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,400
80×100
this size
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $42,500
  • Code Certified
  • Rack Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-WAREHOUSE-INVENTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. 8,000 sq ft high-bay warehouse for pallet racking, bulk inventory, parts storage, contractor supplies, or distribution staging.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~160 pallet positions, full forklift ops. Clear-span width keeps forklift routes open.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse / Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse / Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse / Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse / inventory storage
Everyday warehouse / inventory storage
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse / inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse / inventory storage + seasonal storage
warehouse / inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3098/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3098/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse / Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse / Inventory Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse / Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse / Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage cost?

A 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $148,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3098/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud warehouse / inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse / inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3098/month on a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse / Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud — From $148,700
12
80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,500$148,700SAVE $20,800
or $3098/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Warehouse / Inventory Storage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

8,000 sq ft high-bay warehouse for pallet racking, bulk inventory, parts storage, contractor supplies, or distribution staging. Clear-span width keeps forklift routes open.

You're viewing:Warehouse / Inventory Storage·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,700$169,500Save $20,800
or as low as $3098/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,400
80×100
this size
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $42,500
  • Code Certified
  • Rack Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-WAREHOUSE-INVENTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. 8,000 sq ft high-bay warehouse for pallet racking, bulk inventory, parts storage, contractor supplies, or distribution staging.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~160 pallet positions, full forklift ops. Clear-span width keeps forklift routes open.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse / Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse / Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse / Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse / inventory storage
Everyday warehouse / inventory storage
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse / inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse / inventory storage + seasonal storage
warehouse / inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3098/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3098/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse / Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Warehouse / Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse / Inventory Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse / Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse / Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage cost?

A 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $148,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3098/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud warehouse / inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse / inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3098/month on a 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 80×100 warehouse / inventory storage ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse / Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall | Steel and Stud — From $148,400
12
80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,200$148,400SAVE $20,800
or $3092/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Worship Center / Fellowship Hall
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall, engineered to code for assembly use.

8,000 sq ft column-free interior for worship seating, fellowship meals, classroom partitions, youth programs, or community events with insulation and HVAC-ready framing.

You're viewing:Worship Center / Fellowship Hall·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,400$169,200Save $20,800
or as low as $3092/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,100
80×100
this size
$148,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Clear Span
  • Insulated
  • Code Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-WORSHIP-CENTER-FBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your worship-hall layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Center aisle + side aisles, fellowship space at rear. 8,000 sq ft column-free interior for worship seating, fellowship meals, classroom partitions, youth programs, or community events with insulation and HVAC-ready framing.

Sanctuary / AltarPew seatingFOYER + RESTROOMS + CLASSROOMS80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · worship-hall layout

Sanctuary / Altar · Pew seating · Foyer + Restrooms + Classrooms

Sanctuary / Altar at the front, pew seating in the middle, foyer + restrooms + classrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats ~800 in main sanctuary.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: choir riser, baptistry rough-in, classroom partitions.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Worship Center / Fellowship Hall.

DAILY USEEveryday worship center / fellowship hall
Everyday worship center / fellowship hall
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a worship center / fellowship hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworship center / fellowship hall + seasonal storage
worship center / fellowship hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3092/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3092/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Worship Center / Fellowship Hall shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Worship Center / Fellowship Hall also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall cost?

A 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall from Steel and Stud starts at $148,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3092/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud worship center / fellowship hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud worship center / fellowship hall different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3092/month on a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$148,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall | Steel and Stud — From $148,400
12
80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,200$148,400SAVE $20,800
or $3092/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Worship Center / Fellowship Hall
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall, engineered to code for assembly use.

8,000 sq ft column-free interior for worship seating, fellowship meals, classroom partitions, youth programs, or community events with insulation and HVAC-ready framing.

You're viewing:Worship Center / Fellowship Hall·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,400$169,200Save $20,800
or as low as $3092/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,100
80×100
this size
$148,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Clear Span
  • Insulated
  • Code Certified
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-WORSHIP-CENTER-FBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your worship-hall layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Center aisle + side aisles, fellowship space at rear. 8,000 sq ft column-free interior for worship seating, fellowship meals, classroom partitions, youth programs, or community events with insulation and HVAC-ready framing.

Sanctuary / AltarPew seatingFOYER + RESTROOMS + CLASSROOMS80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · worship-hall layout

Sanctuary / Altar · Pew seating · Foyer + Restrooms + Classrooms

Sanctuary / Altar at the front, pew seating in the middle, foyer + restrooms + classrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats ~800 in main sanctuary.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: choir riser, baptistry rough-in, classroom partitions.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Worship Center / Fellowship Hall.

DAILY USEEveryday worship center / fellowship hall
Everyday worship center / fellowship hall
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a worship center / fellowship hall.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworship center / fellowship hall + seasonal storage
worship center / fellowship hall + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3092/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3092/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Worship Center / Fellowship Hall shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Worship Center / Fellowship Hall also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall cost?

A 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall from Steel and Stud starts at $148,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3092/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud worship center / fellowship hall ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud worship center / fellowship hall different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3092/month on a 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×100 worship center / fellowship hall pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Worship Center / Fellowship Hall quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports | Steel and Stud — From $146,450
12
80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$166,950$146,450SAVE $20,500
or $3051/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports, built for hobby and recreational use.

8,000 sq ft indoor sports space for batting cages, practice courts, strength training, cheer, wrestling, pickleball, indoor turf lanes, or multi-use recreation programs.

You're viewing:Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$146,450$166,950Save $20,500
or as low as $3051/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$117,150
80×100
this size
$146,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $48,500
  • Insulated
  • 20 Clear
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-ATHLETIC-FACILITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. 8,000 sq ft indoor sports space for batting cages, practice courts, strength training, cheer, wrestling, pickleball, indoor turf lanes, or multi-use recreation programs.

4 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + restrooms + storage80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · multi-court layout

4 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + restrooms + storage

4 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + restrooms + storage at the rear. Capacity: 4 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports.

DAILY USEEveryday athletic facility / indoor sports
Everyday athletic facility / indoor sports
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a athletic facility / indoor sports.
STORAGE OVERFLOWathletic facility / indoor sports + seasonal storage
athletic facility / indoor sports + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3051/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3051/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports cost?

A 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports from Steel and Stud starts at $146,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3051/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud athletic facility / indoor sports ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud athletic facility / indoor sports different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3051/month on a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a athletic facility / indoor sports to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$146,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports | Steel and Stud — From $146,450
12
80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$166,950$146,450SAVE $20,500
or $3051/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports, built for hobby and recreational use.

8,000 sq ft indoor sports space for batting cages, practice courts, strength training, cheer, wrestling, pickleball, indoor turf lanes, or multi-use recreation programs.

You're viewing:Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$146,450$166,950Save $20,500
or as low as $3051/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$117,150
80×100
this size
$146,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $48,500
  • Insulated
  • 20 Clear
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-ATHLETIC-FACILITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. 8,000 sq ft indoor sports space for batting cages, practice courts, strength training, cheer, wrestling, pickleball, indoor turf lanes, or multi-use recreation programs.

4 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + restrooms + storage80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · multi-court layout

4 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + restrooms + storage

4 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + restrooms + storage at the rear. Capacity: 4 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports.

DAILY USEEveryday athletic facility / indoor sports
Everyday athletic facility / indoor sports
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a athletic facility / indoor sports.
STORAGE OVERFLOWathletic facility / indoor sports + seasonal storage
athletic facility / indoor sports + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3051/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3051/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports cost?

A 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports from Steel and Stud starts at $146,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3051/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud athletic facility / indoor sports ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud athletic facility / indoor sports different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3051/month on a 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a athletic facility / indoor sports to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$146,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Municipal / Government Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Municipal / Government Facility | Steel and Stud — From $148,400
12
80×100 Municipal / Government Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,200$148,400SAVE $20,800
or $3092/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Municipal / Government Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Municipal / Government Facility, engineered to code for assembly use.

Public works storage, fleet staging, emergency response storage, parks department equipment building, or municipal maintenance facility with stamped engineered drawings.

You're viewing:Municipal / Government Facility·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,400$169,200Save $20,800
or as low as $3092/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,100
80×100
this size
$148,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered
  • 170+ MPH
  • FEMA Options
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-MUNICIPAL-GOVERNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your civic facility layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Multi-purpose hall converts from court to meeting. Public works storage, fleet staging, emergency response storage, parks department equipment building, or municipal maintenance facility with stamped engineered drawings.

Assembly / multi-purpose hallOffice + records wingKITCHEN + RESTROOMS + STORAGE80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · civic facility layout

Assembly / multi-purpose hall · Office + records wing · Kitchen + restrooms + storage

Assembly / multi-purpose hall at the front, office + records wing in the middle, kitchen + restrooms + storage at the rear. Capacity: assembly for 533 + staff offices.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: commercial kitchen, stage riser, emergency-shelter spec.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Municipal / Government Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Municipal / Government Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Municipal / Government Facility spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Municipal / Government Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday municipal / government facility
Everyday municipal / government facility
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a municipal / government facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmunicipal / government facility + seasonal storage
municipal / government facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Municipal / Government Facility — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3092/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 municipal / government facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3092/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Municipal / Government Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Municipal / Government Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Municipal / Government Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Municipal / Government Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Municipal / Government Facility also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Municipal / Government Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 municipal / government facility cost?

A 80×100 municipal / government facility from Steel and Stud starts at $148,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3092/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 municipal / government facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud municipal / government facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 municipal / government facility?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud municipal / government facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 municipal / government facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 municipal / government facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 municipal / government facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3092/month on a 80×100 municipal / government facility.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 municipal / government facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 municipal / government facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×100 municipal / government facility pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Municipal / Government Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$148,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Municipal / Government Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Municipal / Government Facility | Steel and Stud — From $148,400
12
80×100 Municipal / Government Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,200$148,400SAVE $20,800
or $3092/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Municipal / Government Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Municipal / Government Facility, engineered to code for assembly use.

Public works storage, fleet staging, emergency response storage, parks department equipment building, or municipal maintenance facility with stamped engineered drawings.

You're viewing:Municipal / Government Facility·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,400$169,200Save $20,800
or as low as $3092/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,100
80×100
this size
$148,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Engineered
  • 170+ MPH
  • FEMA Options
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-MUNICIPAL-GOVERNBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your civic facility layout.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Multi-purpose hall converts from court to meeting. Public works storage, fleet staging, emergency response storage, parks department equipment building, or municipal maintenance facility with stamped engineered drawings.

Assembly / multi-purpose hallOffice + records wingKITCHEN + RESTROOMS + STORAGE80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · civic facility layout

Assembly / multi-purpose hall · Office + records wing · Kitchen + restrooms + storage

Assembly / multi-purpose hall at the front, office + records wing in the middle, kitchen + restrooms + storage at the rear. Capacity: assembly for 533 + staff offices.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: commercial kitchen, stage riser, emergency-shelter spec.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Municipal / Government Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Municipal / Government Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Municipal / Government Facility spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Municipal / Government Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday municipal / government facility
Everyday municipal / government facility
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a municipal / government facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmunicipal / government facility + seasonal storage
municipal / government facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Municipal / Government Facility — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3092/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 municipal / government facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3092/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Municipal / Government Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Municipal / Government Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Municipal / Government Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Municipal / Government Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Municipal / Government Facility also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Municipal / Government Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 municipal / government facility cost?

A 80×100 municipal / government facility from Steel and Stud starts at $148,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3092/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 municipal / government facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud municipal / government facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 municipal / government facility?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud municipal / government facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 municipal / government facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 municipal / government facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 municipal / government facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3092/month on a 80×100 municipal / government facility.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 municipal / government facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 municipal / government facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 80×100 municipal / government facility pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Municipal / Government Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations | Steel and Stud — From $148,300
12
80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, engineered for code-compliant business use.

8,000 sq ft fleet garage for 24 to 36 work trucks, service vans, utility trailers, municipal vehicles, or contractor equipment. Multiple 80×100 or 80×100 roll-up doors keep daily dispatch organized.

You're viewing:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,000
80×100
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $46,500
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-FLEET-GARAGE-VEHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. 8,000 sq ft fleet garage for 24 to 36 work trucks, service vans, utility trailers, municipal vehicles, or contractor equipment.

5 maintenance baysWash bay + fueling apronParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · fleet service center

5 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

5 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 5+ bays. Multiple 80×100 or 80×100 roll-up doors keep daily dispatch organized.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage / vehicle operations
Everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage / vehicle operations.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
fleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations also viewed:

🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations cost?

A 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations | Steel and Stud — From $148,300
12
80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, engineered for code-compliant business use.

8,000 sq ft fleet garage for 24 to 36 work trucks, service vans, utility trailers, municipal vehicles, or contractor equipment. Multiple 80×100 or 80×100 roll-up doors keep daily dispatch organized.

You're viewing:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,000
80×100
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $46,500
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-FLEET-GARAGE-VEHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. 8,000 sq ft fleet garage for 24 to 36 work trucks, service vans, utility trailers, municipal vehicles, or contractor equipment.

5 maintenance baysWash bay + fueling apronParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · fleet service center

5 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

5 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 5+ bays. Multiple 80×100 or 80×100 roll-up doors keep daily dispatch organized.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage / vehicle operations
Everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage / vehicle operations.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
fleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations also viewed:

🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🏢 80×100

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV / Boat Dealership Inventory →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations cost?

A 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory | Steel and Stud — From $148,300
12
80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100RV / Boat Dealership Inventory
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Indoor inventory floor for travel trailers, fifth wheels, boats, ATVs, UTVs, and recreational equipment. Tall doors and 18 to 20 legs allow easy movement of larger inventory.

You're viewing:RV / Boat Dealership Inventory·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,000
80×100
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $52,000
  • Up to 20’+ Tall
  • Showroom Glazing
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-RV-BOAT-DEALERSHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. Indoor inventory floor for travel trailers, fifth wheels, boats, ATVs, UTVs, and recreational equipment.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A's or RV + boat + daily driver. Tall doors and 18 to 20 legs allow easy movement of larger inventory.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV / Boat Dealership Inventory.

DAILY USEEveryday rv / boat dealership inventory
Everyday rv / boat dealership inventory
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv / boat dealership inventory.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv / boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
rv / boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV / Boat Dealership Inventory shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV / Boat Dealership Inventory also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory cost?

A 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv / boat dealership inventory ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv / boat dealership inventory different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel Industrial Buildings

80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

80′ x 100′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 80×100 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory | Steel and Stud — From $148,300
12
80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings80×100RV / Boat Dealership Inventory
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Indoor inventory floor for travel trailers, fifth wheels, boats, ATVs, UTVs, and recreational equipment. Tall doors and 18 to 20 legs allow easy movement of larger inventory.

You're viewing:RV / Boat Dealership Inventory·Size80×100·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 80×100
80×80
smaller
$119,000
80×100
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $52,000
  • Up to 20’+ Tall
  • Showroom Glazing
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-80X100-RV-BOAT-DEALERSHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-RV garage.

80 feet wide × 100 feet long. 16-ft+ clear height for tall slides + roof AC. Indoor inventory floor for travel trailers, fifth wheels, boats, ATVs, UTVs, and recreational equipment.

MULTIPLE RV BAYSService / wash bayStorage + workshop80′ × 100′ · 8,000 sq ft · multi-RV garage

Multiple RV bays · Service / wash bay · Storage + workshop

Multiple RV bays at the front, service / wash bay in the middle, storage + workshop at the rear. Capacity: 2 Class A's or RV + boat + daily driver. Tall doors and 18 to 20 legs allow easy movement of larger inventory.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: multiple hookups, wash + dump, tool wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 80×100 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory spec sheet.

Width80'
Length100' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV / Boat Dealership Inventory.

DAILY USEEveryday rv / boat dealership inventory
Everyday rv / boat dealership inventory
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv / boat dealership inventory.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv / boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
rv / boat dealership inventory + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory — what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 80×100?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 80′ × 100′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV / Boat Dealership Inventory shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 80×100 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 80×100 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 80×100 RV / Boat Dealership Inventory

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
81×101×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV / Boat Dealership Inventory also viewed:

🏢 80×100

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

80×100 fleet garage / vehicle operations configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations →
🏭 80×100

Manufacturing Floor

80×100 manufacturing floor configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Floor →
🏢 80×100

Distribution Hub

80×100 distribution hub configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Hub →
🏢 80×100

Commercial Showroom / Retail

80×100 commercial showroom / retail configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Showroom / Retail →
🎯 80×100

Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports

80×100 athletic facility / indoor sports configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Athletic Facility / Indoor Sports →
🌾 80×100

Agricultural Processing Facility

80×100 agricultural processing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Agricultural Processing Facility →
🏢 80×100

Trucking Terminal

80×100 trucking terminal configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Trucking Terminal →
🏭 80×100

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

80×100 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 80×100

Municipal / Government Facility

80×100 municipal / government facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Municipal / Government Facility →
🌾 80×100

Indoor Riding Arena

80×100 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏛️ 80×100

Worship Center / Fellowship Hall

80×100 worship center / fellowship hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Worship Center / Fellowship Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV / Boat Dealership Inventory questions, answered.

How much does a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory cost?

A 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud rv / boat dealership inventory ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv / boat dealership inventory different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory.

What warranty comes with the 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 80×100 rv / boat dealership inventory meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your RV / Boat Dealership Inventory quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Aircraft Hangar

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud — From $166,600
12
100×90 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Aircraft Hangar
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Aircraft Hangar, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Private operators use a 100×90 prefab building as a hangar for a King Air 350 or twin-engine turboprop with room to spare for tooling and a small lounge. The 100-foot opening on the gable end accommodates a hydraulic.

You're viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
100×110
longer
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • Bi-Fold Door Ready
  • 20' Eave
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Engineered for column-free clear span at 100ft width. Private operators use a 100×90 prefab building as a hangar for a King Air 350 or twin-engine turboprop with room to spare for tooling and a small lounge.

Multi-aircraft floorMaintenance / engine zoneOffice + parts + pilot lounge100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · multi-aircraft hangar

Multi-aircraft floor · Maintenance / engine zone · Office + parts + pilot lounge

Multi-aircraft floor at the front, maintenance / engine zone in the middle, office + parts + pilot lounge at the rear. Capacity: 2-4 aircraft, full FBO operations. The 100-foot opening on the gable end accommodates a hydraulic bi-fold door, and 20-foot legs clear most light jet tail heights.

💡 Pro tip:20' Eave. Size affords: overhead crane, office mezzanine, parts storage cage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Aircraft Hangar — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×90 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 aircraft hangar price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 aircraft hangar meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Aircraft Hangar

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud — From $166,600
12
100×90 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Aircraft Hangar
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Aircraft Hangar, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Private operators use a 100×90 prefab building as a hangar for a King Air 350 or twin-engine turboprop with room to spare for tooling and a small lounge. The 100-foot opening on the gable end accommodates a hydraulic.

You're viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
100×110
longer
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • Bi-Fold Door Ready
  • 20' Eave
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Engineered for column-free clear span at 100ft width. Private operators use a 100×90 prefab building as a hangar for a King Air 350 or twin-engine turboprop with room to spare for tooling and a small lounge.

Multi-aircraft floorMaintenance / engine zoneOffice + parts + pilot lounge100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · multi-aircraft hangar

Multi-aircraft floor · Maintenance / engine zone · Office + parts + pilot lounge

Multi-aircraft floor at the front, maintenance / engine zone in the middle, office + parts + pilot lounge at the rear. Capacity: 2-4 aircraft, full FBO operations. The 100-foot opening on the gable end accommodates a hydraulic bi-fold door, and 20-foot legs clear most light jet tail heights.

💡 Pro tip:20' Eave. Size affords: overhead crane, office mezzanine, parts storage cage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Aircraft Hangar — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×90 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 aircraft hangar price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 aircraft hangar meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance | Steel and Stud — From $167,000
12
100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$190,400$167,000SAVE $23,400
or $3479/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Truck and Fleet Maintenance
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Fleet operators spec a 100×90 with three 100×90 roll-ups on the long wall for pull-through service of Class 8 tractors. The 100-foot depth fits a tractor-trailer fully inside with the door closed, and 20-foot legs.

You're viewing:Truck and Fleet Maintenance·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$167,000$190,400Save $23,400
or as low as $3479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,700
100×90
this size
$167,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14x14 Roll-Ups
  • Pull-Through
  • Class 8 Clearance
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-TRUCK-FLEET-MAINBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. Fleet operators spec a 100×90 with three 100×90 roll-ups on the long wall for pull-through service of Class 8 tractors.

7 maintenance baysWASH BAY + FUELING APRONParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays. The 100-foot depth fits a tractor-trailer fully inside with the door closed, and 20-foot legs accommodate lifts and exhaust extraction systems.

💡 Pro tip:Class 8 Clearance. Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck and Fleet Maintenance.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck and Fleet Maintenance spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck and Fleet Maintenance.

DAILY USEEveryday truck and fleet maintenance
Everyday truck and fleet maintenance
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck and fleet maintenance.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck and fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
truck and fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck and Fleet Maintenance shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck and Fleet Maintenance · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck and Fleet Maintenance also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck and Fleet Maintenance questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance cost?

A 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance from Steel and Stud starts at $167,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck and fleet maintenance ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck and fleet maintenance different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3479/month on a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck and Fleet Maintenance quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance | Steel and Stud — From $167,000
12
100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$190,400$167,000SAVE $23,400
or $3479/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Truck and Fleet Maintenance
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Fleet operators spec a 100×90 with three 100×90 roll-ups on the long wall for pull-through service of Class 8 tractors. The 100-foot depth fits a tractor-trailer fully inside with the door closed, and 20-foot legs.

You're viewing:Truck and Fleet Maintenance·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$167,000$190,400Save $23,400
or as low as $3479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,700
100×90
this size
$167,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14x14 Roll-Ups
  • Pull-Through
  • Class 8 Clearance
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-TRUCK-FLEET-MAINBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. Fleet operators spec a 100×90 with three 100×90 roll-ups on the long wall for pull-through service of Class 8 tractors.

7 maintenance baysWASH BAY + FUELING APRONParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays. The 100-foot depth fits a tractor-trailer fully inside with the door closed, and 20-foot legs accommodate lifts and exhaust extraction systems.

💡 Pro tip:Class 8 Clearance. Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck and Fleet Maintenance.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck and Fleet Maintenance spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck and Fleet Maintenance.

DAILY USEEveryday truck and fleet maintenance
Everyday truck and fleet maintenance
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck and fleet maintenance.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck and fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
truck and fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck and Fleet Maintenance shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck and Fleet Maintenance · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck and Fleet Maintenance also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck and Fleet Maintenance questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance cost?

A 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance from Steel and Stud starts at $167,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck and fleet maintenance ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck and fleet maintenance different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3479/month on a 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×90 truck and fleet maintenance ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck and Fleet Maintenance quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Cold Storage Building

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Cold Storage Building | Steel and Stud — From $167,000
12
100×90 Cold Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$190,400$167,000SAVE $23,400
or $3479/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Cold Storage Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Cold Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Cold storage operators insulate a 100×90 PEMB with closed-cell spray foam and insulated metal panels for refrigerated produce, dairy, or pharma staging. The 9,000 sq ft layout supports two temperature zones split by an.

You're viewing:Cold Storage Building·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$167,000$190,400Save $23,400
or as low as $3479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,700
100×90
this size
$167,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • IMP Panels
  • Spray Foam
  • Two-Zone Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-COLD-STORAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your cold-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. 16-ft clear height for racked cold storage. Cold storage operators insulate a 100×90 PEMB with closed-cell spray foam and insulated metal panels for refrigerated produce, dairy, or pharma staging.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Freezer + cooler baysStaging / breakroom + compressor roomDock-height loading100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · cold-storage facility

Freezer + cooler bays · Staging / breakroom + compressor room · Dock-height loading

Freezer + cooler bays at the front, staging / breakroom + compressor room in the middle, dock-height loading at the rear. Capacity: ~150 pallet positions across temp zones. The 9,000 sq ft layout supports two temperature zones split by an interior partition, with vapor-sealed framed openings sized for thermal roll-ups.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Zone Layout. Size affords: multiple temp zones, dock levelers, glycol/ammonia pad.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Cold Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage building
Everyday cold storage building
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage building + seasonal storage
cold storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Cold Storage Building — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 cold storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Cold Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Cold Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 cold storage building cost?

A 100×90 cold storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $167,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 cold storage building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud cold storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 cold storage building?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 cold storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 cold storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 cold storage building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3479/month on a 100×90 cold storage building.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 cold storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 cold storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 cold storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×90 cold storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Cold Storage Building

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Cold Storage Building | Steel and Stud — From $167,000
12
100×90 Cold Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$190,400$167,000SAVE $23,400
or $3479/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Cold Storage Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Cold Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Cold storage operators insulate a 100×90 PEMB with closed-cell spray foam and insulated metal panels for refrigerated produce, dairy, or pharma staging. The 9,000 sq ft layout supports two temperature zones split by an.

You're viewing:Cold Storage Building·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$167,000$190,400Save $23,400
or as low as $3479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,700
100×90
this size
$167,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • IMP Panels
  • Spray Foam
  • Two-Zone Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-COLD-STORAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your cold-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. 16-ft clear height for racked cold storage. Cold storage operators insulate a 100×90 PEMB with closed-cell spray foam and insulated metal panels for refrigerated produce, dairy, or pharma staging.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Freezer + cooler baysStaging / breakroom + compressor roomDock-height loading100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · cold-storage facility

Freezer + cooler bays · Staging / breakroom + compressor room · Dock-height loading

Freezer + cooler bays at the front, staging / breakroom + compressor room in the middle, dock-height loading at the rear. Capacity: ~150 pallet positions across temp zones. The 9,000 sq ft layout supports two temperature zones split by an interior partition, with vapor-sealed framed openings sized for thermal roll-ups.

💡 Pro tip:Two-Zone Layout. Size affords: multiple temp zones, dock levelers, glycol/ammonia pad.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Cold Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage building
Everyday cold storage building
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage building + seasonal storage
cold storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Cold Storage Building — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 cold storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Cold Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Cold Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 cold storage building cost?

A 100×90 cold storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $167,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 cold storage building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud cold storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 cold storage building?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 cold storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 cold storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 cold storage building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3479/month on a 100×90 cold storage building.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 cold storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 cold storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 cold storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×90 cold storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Self-Storage Facility

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $166,600
12
100×90 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Self-Storage Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial real estate investors build a 100×90 metal building as a single-story self-storage with roughly 60–75 mixed-size units accessed by interior corridors. Lower 12-foot legs keep cubage costs down, and steel-stud.

You're viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
100×110
longer
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Steel Partitions
  • 60+ Units
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your storage-facility layout.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Drive-through aisle lets tenants load out of the weather. Commercial real estate investors build a 100×90 metal building as a single-story self-storage with roughly 60–75 mixed-size units accessed by interior corridors.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Multiple unit rowsDrive-thru loading aisleOffice + climate wing + security100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · storage-facility layout

Multiple unit rows · Drive-thru loading aisle · Office + climate wing + security

Multiple unit rows at the front, drive-thru loading aisle in the middle, office + climate wing + security at the rear. Capacity: ~67 units incl. drive-thru access. Lower 12-foot legs keep cubage costs down, and steel-stud partitions divide the interior bays without reframing the shell.

💡 Pro tip:60+ Units. Size affords: drive-thru aisle, climate zone, office/apartment.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Self-Storage Facility — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 self-storage facility cost?

A 100×90 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 self-storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Self-Storage Facility

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $166,600
12
100×90 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Self-Storage Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial real estate investors build a 100×90 metal building as a single-story self-storage with roughly 60–75 mixed-size units accessed by interior corridors. Lower 12-foot legs keep cubage costs down, and steel-stud.

You're viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
100×110
longer
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Steel Partitions
  • 60+ Units
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your storage-facility layout.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Drive-through aisle lets tenants load out of the weather. Commercial real estate investors build a 100×90 metal building as a single-story self-storage with roughly 60–75 mixed-size units accessed by interior corridors.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Multiple unit rowsDrive-thru loading aisleOffice + climate wing + security100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · storage-facility layout

Multiple unit rows · Drive-thru loading aisle · Office + climate wing + security

Multiple unit rows at the front, drive-thru loading aisle in the middle, office + climate wing + security at the rear. Capacity: ~67 units incl. drive-thru access. Lower 12-foot legs keep cubage costs down, and steel-stud partitions divide the interior bays without reframing the shell.

💡 Pro tip:60+ Units. Size affords: drive-thru aisle, climate zone, office/apartment.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Self-Storage Facility — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 self-storage facility cost?

A 100×90 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 self-storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Indoor Sports Facility | Steel and Stud — From $166,600
12
100×90 Indoor Sports Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Indoor Sports Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Recreational developers convert a 100×90 prefab steel building into a batting cage facility, indoor soccer half-pitch, or pickleball center with four courts. Insulated panels stabilize temperature, and skylights with.

You're viewing:Indoor Sports Facility·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Skylights
  • 4 Pickleball Courts
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-INDOOR-SPORTS-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. Recreational developers convert a 100×90 prefab steel building into a batting cage facility, indoor soccer half-pitch, or pickleball center with four courts.

5 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + restrooms + storage100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · multi-court layout

5 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + restrooms + storage

5 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + restrooms + storage at the rear. Capacity: 5 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court. Insulated panels stabilize temperature, and skylights with LED high-bays handle daylight scheduling without window glare.

💡 Pro tip:4 Pickleball Courts. Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports facility
Everyday indoor sports facility
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 indoor sports facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Sports Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 indoor sports facility cost?

A 100×90 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 indoor sports facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor sports facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 indoor sports facility?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 indoor sports facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 indoor sports facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 indoor sports facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 indoor sports facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 indoor sports facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 indoor sports facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 indoor sports facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Indoor Sports Facility | Steel and Stud — From $166,600
12
100×90 Indoor Sports Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$189,900$166,600SAVE $23,300
or $3471/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Indoor Sports Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Recreational developers convert a 100×90 prefab steel building into a batting cage facility, indoor soccer half-pitch, or pickleball center with four courts. Insulated panels stabilize temperature, and skylights with.

You're viewing:Indoor Sports Facility·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$166,600$189,900Save $23,300
or as low as $3471/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,300
100×90
this size
$166,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Skylights
  • 4 Pickleball Courts
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-INDOOR-SPORTS-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-court layout.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Eave height set for volley + lob clearance. Recreational developers convert a 100×90 prefab steel building into a batting cage facility, indoor soccer half-pitch, or pickleball center with four courts.

5 courtsSPECTATOR + BENCH LANELobby + restrooms + storage100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · multi-court layout

5 courts · Spectator + bench lane · Lobby + restrooms + storage

5 courts at the front, spectator + bench lane in the middle, lobby + restrooms + storage at the rear. Capacity: 5 pickleball courts or 1 full basketball court. Insulated panels stabilize temperature, and skylights with LED high-bays handle daylight scheduling without window glare.

💡 Pro tip:4 Pickleball Courts. Size affords: divider curtains, scoreboards, rubber flooring.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports facility
Everyday indoor sports facility
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Indoor Sports Facility — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3471/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 indoor sports facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3471/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Indoor Sports Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Sports Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse Steel Building →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 indoor sports facility cost?

A 100×90 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud starts at $166,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3471/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 indoor sports facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor sports facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 indoor sports facility?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 indoor sports facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 indoor sports facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 indoor sports facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3471/month on a 100×90 indoor sports facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 indoor sports facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 indoor sports facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×90 indoor sports facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$166,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Warehouse Steel Building | Steel and Stud — From $167,000
12
100×90 Warehouse Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$190,400$167,000SAVE $23,400
or $3479/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Warehouse Steel Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Industrial buyers spec the 100×90 warehouse kit for bulk storage of palletized inventory, drum storage, or staged finished goods. At 9,000 sq ft you fit roughly 1,400 standard pallet positions on selective racking with.

You're viewing:Warehouse Steel Building·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$167,000$190,400Save $23,400
or as low as $3479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,700
100×90
this size
$167,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 1,400 Pallet Positions
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-WAREHOUSE-STEEL-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Industrial buyers spec the 100×90 warehouse kit for bulk storage of palletized inventory, drum storage, or staged finished goods.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~180 pallet positions, full forklift ops. At 9,000 sq ft you fit roughly 1,400 standard pallet positions on selective racking with room for a small office build-out.

💡 Pro tip:1,400 Pallet Positions. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse Steel Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse steel building
Everyday warehouse steel building
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse steel building + seasonal storage
warehouse steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 warehouse steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse Steel Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse Steel Building also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 warehouse steel building cost?

A 100×90 warehouse steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $167,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 warehouse steel building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud warehouse steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 warehouse steel building?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 warehouse steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 warehouse steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 warehouse steel building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3479/month on a 100×90 warehouse steel building.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 warehouse steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 warehouse steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 warehouse steel building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×90 warehouse steel building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x90 metal building: primary product hero render (9,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 50×50 source) from Steel and Stud

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×90 Warehouse Steel Building | Steel and Stud — From $167,000
12
100×90 Warehouse Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$190,400$167,000SAVE $23,400
or $3479/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×90Warehouse Steel Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Industrial buyers spec the 100×90 warehouse kit for bulk storage of palletized inventory, drum storage, or staged finished goods. At 9,000 sq ft you fit roughly 1,400 standard pallet positions on selective racking with.

You're viewing:Warehouse Steel Building·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$167,000$190,400Save $23,400
or as low as $3479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,700
100×90
this size
$167,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 1,400 Pallet Positions
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-WAREHOUSE-STEEL-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Industrial buyers spec the 100×90 warehouse kit for bulk storage of palletized inventory, drum storage, or staged finished goods.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~180 pallet positions, full forklift ops. At 9,000 sq ft you fit roughly 1,400 standard pallet positions on selective racking with room for a small office build-out.

💡 Pro tip:1,400 Pallet Positions. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse Steel Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length90' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse steel building
Everyday warehouse steel building
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse steel building + seasonal storage
warehouse steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Warehouse Steel Building — what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 warehouse steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Warehouse Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse Steel Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse Steel Building also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Center →
🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Building →
🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →
🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Sports Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 warehouse steel building cost?

A 100×90 warehouse steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $167,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 warehouse steel building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud warehouse steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 warehouse steel building?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 warehouse steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 warehouse steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 warehouse steel building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3479/month on a 100×90 warehouse steel building.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 warehouse steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 warehouse steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 warehouse steel building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×90 warehouse steel building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn | Steel and Stud — From $201,350
12
100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$229,550$201,350SAVE $28,200
or $4195/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Event Venue & Wedding Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn, built for hobby and recreational use.

Event operators convert the 100×110 into a 400-seat venue with catering kitchen, bridal suite, and a 100×110 dance floor. Decorative gables, two-tone wainscoting, and Barn Red trim deliver the rustic look; insulated.

You're viewing:Event Venue & Wedding Barn·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$201,350$229,550Save $28,200
or as low as $4195/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$201,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Decorative Gables
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-EVENT-VENUE-WEDDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your banquet hall layout.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Engineered for column-free open span at this width. Event operators convert the 100×110 into a 400-seat venue with catering kitchen, bridal suite, and a 100×110 dance floor.

Stage + greenroomBANQUET FLOOR (916 SEATS)Catering kitchen + bar + restrooms100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · banquet hall layout

Stage + greenroom · Banquet floor (916 seats) · Catering kitchen + bar + restrooms

Stage + greenroom at the front, banquet floor (916 seats) in the middle, catering kitchen + bar + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats 916, full-service banquet. Decorative gables, two-tone wainscoting, and Barn Red trim deliver the rustic look; insulated walls and a permitted HVAC system keep it bookable year-round across all 48 states.

💡 Pro tip:Year-Round Use. Size affords: fixed stage with riser, dressing rooms, separate caterer entrance.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Event Venue & Wedding Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Event Venue & Wedding Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Event Venue & Wedding Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday event venue & wedding barn
Everyday event venue & wedding barn
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a event venue & wedding barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWevent venue & wedding barn + seasonal storage
event venue & wedding barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4195/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 event venue & wedding barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4195/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Event Venue & Wedding Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Event Venue & Wedding Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Event Venue & Wedding Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Event Venue & Wedding Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn cost?

A 100×110 event venue & wedding barn from Steel and Stud starts at $201,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4195/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 event venue & wedding barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud event venue & wedding barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud event venue & wedding barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4195/month on a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 event venue & wedding barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 event venue & wedding barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×110 event venue & wedding barn for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a event venue & wedding barn to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Event Venue & Wedding Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$201,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn | Steel and Stud — From $201,350
12
100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$229,550$201,350SAVE $28,200
or $4195/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Event Venue & Wedding Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn, built for hobby and recreational use.

Event operators convert the 100×110 into a 400-seat venue with catering kitchen, bridal suite, and a 100×110 dance floor. Decorative gables, two-tone wainscoting, and Barn Red trim deliver the rustic look; insulated.

You're viewing:Event Venue & Wedding Barn·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$201,350$229,550Save $28,200
or as low as $4195/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$201,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Decorative Gables
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-EVENT-VENUE-WEDDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your banquet hall layout.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Engineered for column-free open span at this width. Event operators convert the 100×110 into a 400-seat venue with catering kitchen, bridal suite, and a 100×110 dance floor.

Stage + greenroomBANQUET FLOOR (916 SEATS)Catering kitchen + bar + restrooms100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · banquet hall layout

Stage + greenroom · Banquet floor (916 seats) · Catering kitchen + bar + restrooms

Stage + greenroom at the front, banquet floor (916 seats) in the middle, catering kitchen + bar + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: seats 916, full-service banquet. Decorative gables, two-tone wainscoting, and Barn Red trim deliver the rustic look; insulated walls and a permitted HVAC system keep it bookable year-round across all 48 states.

💡 Pro tip:Year-Round Use. Size affords: fixed stage with riser, dressing rooms, separate caterer entrance.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Event Venue & Wedding Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Event Venue & Wedding Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Event Venue & Wedding Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday event venue & wedding barn
Everyday event venue & wedding barn
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a event venue & wedding barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWevent venue & wedding barn + seasonal storage
event venue & wedding barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4195/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 event venue & wedding barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4195/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Event Venue & Wedding Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Event Venue & Wedding Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Event Venue & Wedding Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Event Venue & Wedding Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Event Venue & Wedding Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn cost?

A 100×110 event venue & wedding barn from Steel and Stud starts at $201,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4195/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 event venue & wedding barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud event venue & wedding barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud event venue & wedding barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4195/month on a 100×110 event venue & wedding barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 event venue & wedding barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 event venue & wedding barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×110 event venue & wedding barn for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a event venue & wedding barn to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Event Venue & Wedding Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$201,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building | Steel and Stud — From $203,200
12
100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$231,650$203,200SAVE $28,450
or $4233/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Auto Dealership & Service Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial real estate developers run the 100×110 as an integrated dealership: 60 ft of glass storefront on one gable for the showroom, 50 ft of service bays with eight 100×110 roll-ups along the side wall. Wainscoted.

You're viewing:Auto Dealership & Service Building·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,200$231,650Save $28,450
or as low as $4233/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Storefront Glass
  • 8 Roll-Ups
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-AUTO-DEALERSHIP-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full-service auto center.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Separate clean and dirty zones with fire-rated partition. Commercial real estate developers run the 100×110 as an integrated dealership: 60 ft of glass storefront on one gable for the showroom, 50 ft of service bays with eight 100×110 roll-ups along the side wall.

7+ service baysBody / paint wingPARTS WAREHOUSE + WRITERS + WAITING100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · full-service auto center

7+ service bays · Body / paint wing · Parts warehouse + writers + waiting

7+ service bays at the front, body / paint wing in the middle, parts warehouse + writers + waiting at the rear. Capacity: 7+ bays, body + mechanical under one roof. Wainscoted curb appeal meets industrial-grade service capacity under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: paint booth, frame rack, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Dealership & Service Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Dealership & Service Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Dealership & Service Building.

DAILY USEEveryday auto dealership & service building
Everyday auto dealership & service building
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto dealership & service building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto dealership & service building + seasonal storage
auto dealership & service building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4233/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 auto dealership & service building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4233/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Dealership & Service Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Dealership & Service Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Dealership & Service Building also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Dealership & Service Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 auto dealership & service building cost?

A 100×110 auto dealership & service building from Steel and Stud starts at $203,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4233/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 auto dealership & service building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto dealership & service building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 auto dealership & service building?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto dealership & service building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 auto dealership & service building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 auto dealership & service building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 auto dealership & service building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4233/month on a 100×110 auto dealership & service building.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 auto dealership & service building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 auto dealership & service building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×110 auto dealership & service building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Dealership & Service Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building | Steel and Stud — From $203,200
12
100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$231,650$203,200SAVE $28,450
or $4233/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Auto Dealership & Service Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial real estate developers run the 100×110 as an integrated dealership: 60 ft of glass storefront on one gable for the showroom, 50 ft of service bays with eight 100×110 roll-ups along the side wall. Wainscoted.

You're viewing:Auto Dealership & Service Building·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,200$231,650Save $28,450
or as low as $4233/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Storefront Glass
  • 8 Roll-Ups
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-AUTO-DEALERSHIP-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full-service auto center.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Separate clean and dirty zones with fire-rated partition. Commercial real estate developers run the 100×110 as an integrated dealership: 60 ft of glass storefront on one gable for the showroom, 50 ft of service bays with eight 100×110 roll-ups along the side wall.

7+ service baysBody / paint wingPARTS WAREHOUSE + WRITERS + WAITING100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · full-service auto center

7+ service bays · Body / paint wing · Parts warehouse + writers + waiting

7+ service bays at the front, body / paint wing in the middle, parts warehouse + writers + waiting at the rear. Capacity: 7+ bays, body + mechanical under one roof. Wainscoted curb appeal meets industrial-grade service capacity under one roof.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: paint booth, frame rack, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Auto Dealership & Service Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auto Dealership & Service Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Auto Dealership & Service Building.

DAILY USEEveryday auto dealership & service building
Everyday auto dealership & service building
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a auto dealership & service building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWauto dealership & service building + seasonal storage
auto dealership & service building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4233/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 auto dealership & service building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4233/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Auto Dealership & Service Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Auto Dealership & Service Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Auto Dealership & Service Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Auto Dealership & Service Building also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Auto Dealership & Service Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 auto dealership & service building cost?

A 100×110 auto dealership & service building from Steel and Stud starts at $203,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4233/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 auto dealership & service building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud auto dealership & service building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 auto dealership & service building?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud auto dealership & service building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 auto dealership & service building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 auto dealership & service building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 auto dealership & service building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4233/month on a 100×110 auto dealership & service building.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 auto dealership & service building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 auto dealership & service building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×110 auto dealership & service building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Auto Dealership & Service Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable | Steel and Stud — From $202,000
12
100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$230,300$202,000SAVE $28,300
or $4208/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Indoor Riding Arena & Stable
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable, built for farm and ranch demands.

Equestrian operators pair a 100-ft-wide riding surface with a 20-ft stall row down one long wall — eight 100×110 stalls, tack room, and wash bay. The clear span lets a horse work a full lunge circle. Sliding barn doors.

You're viewing:Indoor Riding Arena & Stable·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$202,000$230,300Save $28,300
or as low as $4208/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$202,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Skylights
  • Clear-Span Arena
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full riding arena.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Engineered clear-span trusses, no interior columns. Equestrian operators pair a 100-ft-wide riding surface with a 20-ft stall row down one long wall — eight 100×110 stalls, tack room, and wash bay.

Competition-size riding floorRAIL + SPECTATOR LANEAttached stalls + tack wing100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · full riding arena

Competition-size riding floor · Rail + spectator lane · Attached stalls + tack wing

Competition-size riding floor at the front, rail + spectator lane in the middle, attached stalls + tack wing at the rear. Capacity: 100×110 clear span — jumping + dressage work. The clear span lets a horse work a full lunge circle.

💡 Pro tip:Clear-Span Arena. Size affords: attached stable wing, judge stand, sprinkler dust control.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena & Stable.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena & Stable.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena & stable
Everyday indoor riding arena & stable
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena & stable.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena & stable + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena & stable + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4208/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4208/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena & Stable shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Riding Arena & Stable · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena & Stable also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable cost?

A 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable from Steel and Stud starts at $202,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4208/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena & stable ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena & stable different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4208/month on a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena & Stable quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$202,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable | Steel and Stud — From $202,000
12
100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$230,300$202,000SAVE $28,300
or $4208/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Indoor Riding Arena & Stable
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable, built for farm and ranch demands.

Equestrian operators pair a 100-ft-wide riding surface with a 20-ft stall row down one long wall — eight 100×110 stalls, tack room, and wash bay. The clear span lets a horse work a full lunge circle. Sliding barn doors.

You're viewing:Indoor Riding Arena & Stable·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$202,000$230,300Save $28,300
or as low as $4208/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$202,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Skylights
  • Clear-Span Arena
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full riding arena.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Engineered clear-span trusses, no interior columns. Equestrian operators pair a 100-ft-wide riding surface with a 20-ft stall row down one long wall — eight 100×110 stalls, tack room, and wash bay.

Competition-size riding floorRAIL + SPECTATOR LANEAttached stalls + tack wing100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · full riding arena

Competition-size riding floor · Rail + spectator lane · Attached stalls + tack wing

Competition-size riding floor at the front, rail + spectator lane in the middle, attached stalls + tack wing at the rear. Capacity: 100×110 clear span — jumping + dressage work. The clear span lets a horse work a full lunge circle.

💡 Pro tip:Clear-Span Arena. Size affords: attached stable wing, judge stand, sprinkler dust control.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena & Stable.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena & Stable.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena & stable
Everyday indoor riding arena & stable
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena & stable.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena & stable + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena & stable + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4208/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4208/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena & Stable shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Riding Arena & Stable · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena & Stable also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable cost?

A 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable from Steel and Stud starts at $202,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4208/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena & stable ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena & stable different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4208/month on a 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×110 indoor riding arena & stable stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena & Stable quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$202,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Regional Distribution Center

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Regional Distribution Center | Steel and Stud — From $203,200
12
100×110 Regional Distribution Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$231,650$203,200SAVE $28,450
or $4233/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Regional Distribution Center
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Regional Distribution Center, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Logistics operators spec the 100×110 distribution center to run full pallet-rack aisles plus a 12-truck dock line along the 110-ft wall. The 18-20 ft eave height clears a 53-ft trailer dock leveler with VRC mezzanine.

You're viewing:Regional Distribution Center·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,200$231,650Save $28,450
or as low as $4233/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 20' Eave
  • Dock-Ready Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-REGIONAL-DISTRIBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Logistics operators spec the 100×110 distribution center to run full pallet-rack aisles plus a 12-truck dock line along the 110-ft wall.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOFFICE MEZZANINE + BREAK + RESTROOMS100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~220 pallet positions, full forklift ops. The 18-20 ft eave height clears a 53-ft trailer dock leveler with VRC mezzanine room above.

💡 Pro tip:Dock-Ready Layout. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Regional Distribution Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Regional Distribution Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Regional Distribution Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Regional Distribution Center.

DAILY USEEveryday regional distribution center
Everyday regional distribution center
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a regional distribution center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWregional distribution center + seasonal storage
regional distribution center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Regional Distribution Center — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4233/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 regional distribution center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4233/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Regional Distribution Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Regional Distribution Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Regional Distribution Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Regional Distribution Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Regional Distribution Center also viewed:

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Regional Distribution Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 regional distribution center cost?

A 100×110 regional distribution center from Steel and Stud starts at $203,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4233/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 regional distribution center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud regional distribution center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 regional distribution center?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud regional distribution center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 regional distribution center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 regional distribution center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 regional distribution center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4233/month on a 100×110 regional distribution center.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 regional distribution center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 regional distribution center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×110 regional distribution center meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Regional Distribution Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Regional Distribution Center

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Regional Distribution Center | Steel and Stud — From $203,200
12
100×110 Regional Distribution Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$231,650$203,200SAVE $28,450
or $4233/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Regional Distribution Center
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Regional Distribution Center, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Logistics operators spec the 100×110 distribution center to run full pallet-rack aisles plus a 12-truck dock line along the 110-ft wall. The 18-20 ft eave height clears a 53-ft trailer dock leveler with VRC mezzanine.

You're viewing:Regional Distribution Center·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$203,200$231,650Save $28,450
or as low as $4233/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$203,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 20' Eave
  • Dock-Ready Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-REGIONAL-DISTRIBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Logistics operators spec the 100×110 distribution center to run full pallet-rack aisles plus a 12-truck dock line along the 110-ft wall.

Multi-dock loading baysHigh-bay racking aislesOFFICE MEZZANINE + BREAK + RESTROOMS100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~220 pallet positions, full forklift ops. The 18-20 ft eave height clears a 53-ft trailer dock leveler with VRC mezzanine room above.

💡 Pro tip:Dock-Ready Layout. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Regional Distribution Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Regional Distribution Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Regional Distribution Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Regional Distribution Center.

DAILY USEEveryday regional distribution center
Everyday regional distribution center
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a regional distribution center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWregional distribution center + seasonal storage
regional distribution center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Regional Distribution Center — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4233/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 regional distribution center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4233/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Regional Distribution Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Regional Distribution Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Regional Distribution Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Regional Distribution Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Regional Distribution Center also viewed:

🌾 100×110

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

100×110 hay storage & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay Storage & Equipment Barn →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Regional Distribution Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 regional distribution center cost?

A 100×110 regional distribution center from Steel and Stud starts at $203,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4233/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 regional distribution center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud regional distribution center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 regional distribution center?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud regional distribution center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 regional distribution center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 regional distribution center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 regional distribution center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4233/month on a 100×110 regional distribution center.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 regional distribution center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 regional distribution center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×110 regional distribution center meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Regional Distribution Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$203,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn | Steel and Stud — From $202,000
12
100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$230,300$202,000SAVE $28,300
or $4208/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Hay Storage & Equipment Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Agricultural-industrial operators stack 11,000 sq ft of square-bale hay six high with a center drive lane for the loader tractor. Two 100×110 roll-up doors at the gables let a baler and a combine cross through. The 4:12.

You're viewing:Hay Storage & Equipment Barn·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$202,000$230,300Save $28,300
or as low as $4208/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$202,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 4:12 Pitch
  • Snow-Rated 65 PSF
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-HAY-STORAGE-EQUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commodity hay barn.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Open gables vent moisture off fresh-cut hay. Agricultural-industrial operators stack 11,000 sq ft of square-bale hay six high with a center drive lane for the loader tractor.

High-stack bale storageEQUIPMENT ALLEYGrain / feed room + scale100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · commodity hay barn

High-stack bale storage · Equipment alley · Grain / feed room + scale

High-stack bale storage at the front, equipment alley in the middle, grain / feed room + scale at the rear. Capacity: ~2,061 sq bales at 3-high — telehandler stackable higher. Two 100×110 roll-up doors at the gables let a baler and a combine cross through.

💡 Pro tip:Snow-Rated 65 PSF. Size affords: telehandler-height stacking, commodity bays, truck scale apron.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay Storage & Equipment Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay Storage & Equipment Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hay storage & equipment barn
Everyday hay storage & equipment barn
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay storage & equipment barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay storage & equipment barn + seasonal storage
hay storage & equipment barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4208/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4208/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay Storage & Equipment Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay Storage & Equipment Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay Storage & Equipment Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn cost?

A 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn from Steel and Stud starts at $202,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4208/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hay storage & equipment barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay storage & equipment barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4208/month on a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay Storage & Equipment Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$202,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
100x110 metal building: primary product hero render (11,000 sq ft, proportion-matched from 36×41 source) from Steel and Stud

100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

11,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×110 steel building delivers 11,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn | Steel and Stud — From $202,000
12
100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$230,300$202,000SAVE $28,300
or $4208/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×110Hay Storage & Equipment Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Agricultural-industrial operators stack 11,000 sq ft of square-bale hay six high with a center drive lane for the loader tractor. Two 100×110 roll-up doors at the gables let a baler and a combine cross through. The 4:12.

You're viewing:Hay Storage & Equipment Barn·Size100×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$202,000$230,300Save $28,300
or as low as $4208/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×110
100×110
this size
$202,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 11,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 4:12 Pitch
  • Snow-Rated 65 PSF
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X110-HAY-STORAGE-EQUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commodity hay barn.

100 feet wide × 110 feet long. Open gables vent moisture off fresh-cut hay. Agricultural-industrial operators stack 11,000 sq ft of square-bale hay six high with a center drive lane for the loader tractor.

High-stack bale storageEQUIPMENT ALLEYGrain / feed room + scale100′ × 110′ · 11,000 sq ft · commodity hay barn

High-stack bale storage · Equipment alley · Grain / feed room + scale

High-stack bale storage at the front, equipment alley in the middle, grain / feed room + scale at the rear. Capacity: ~2,061 sq bales at 3-high — telehandler stackable higher. Two 100×110 roll-up doors at the gables let a baler and a combine cross through.

💡 Pro tip:Snow-Rated 65 PSF. Size affords: telehandler-height stacking, commodity bays, truck scale apron.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay Storage & Equipment Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
11,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length110' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space11,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay Storage & Equipment Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday hay storage & equipment barn
Everyday hay storage & equipment barn
11,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay storage & equipment barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay storage & equipment barn + seasonal storage
hay storage & equipment barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn — what makes it different.

11,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4208/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4208/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×110?

11,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 110′ footprint with 11,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $88,000–$132,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay Storage & Equipment Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×110 Hay Storage & Equipment Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay Storage & Equipment Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$49,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay Storage & Equipment Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×110

Regional Distribution Center

100×110 regional distribution center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Regional Distribution Center →
🏢 100×110

Auto Dealership & Service Building

100×110 auto dealership & service building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Dealership & Service Building →
🎯 100×110

Indoor Pickleball Complex

100×110 indoor pickleball complex configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Pickleball Complex →
🏢 100×110

Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air)

100×110 aircraft hangar (single-engine to king air) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar (Single-Engine to King Air) →
🎯 100×110

Event Venue & Wedding Barn

100×110 event venue & wedding barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$201,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Event Venue & Wedding Barn →
🌾 100×110

Indoor Riding Arena & Stable

100×110 indoor riding arena & stable configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$202,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena & Stable →
🏢 100×110

Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru)

100×110 self-storage facility (drive-thru) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$203,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility (Drive-Thru) →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay Storage & Equipment Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn cost?

A 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn from Steel and Stud starts at $202,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4208/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud hay storage & equipment barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn?

Almost always for 11,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay storage & equipment barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4208/month on a 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×110 hay storage & equipment barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay Storage & Equipment Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$202,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building | Steel and Stud — From $220,300
12
100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$251,150$220,300SAVE $30,850
or $4590/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Livestock & Dairy Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

Dairy operators and feedlot managers use 100×120 to house 80-120 head with feed alley, milking parlor, and a maternity pen under one roof. Open ridge venting and sidewall curtains are spec'd in the customize step, and.

You're viewing:Livestock & Dairy Building·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$220,300$251,150Save $30,850
or as low as $4590/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$202,000
100×120
this size
$220,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Ridge Vent
  • Concrete Kneewall
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-LIVESTOCK-DAIRY-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your production livestock barn.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Ridge vent + sidewall curtains for tunnel airflow. Dairy operators and feedlot managers use 100×120 to house 80-120 head with feed alley, milking parlor, and a maternity pen under one roof.

Housing rows / free stallsCENTER FEED DRIVEMilk room / handling + office100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · production livestock barn

Housing rows / free stalls · Center feed drive · Milk room / handling + office

Housing rows / free stalls at the front, center feed drive in the middle, milk room / handling + office at the rear. Capacity: 120 head production capacity. Open ridge venting and sidewall curtains are spec'd in the customize step, and concrete kneewalls with steel above protect the lower panels.

💡 Pro tip:Livestock-Ready Vent. Size affords: curtain sidewalls, handling chute wing, manure alley.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Livestock & Dairy Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Livestock & Dairy Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Livestock & Dairy Building.

DAILY USEEveryday livestock & dairy building
Everyday livestock & dairy building
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a livestock & dairy building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlivestock & dairy building + seasonal storage
livestock & dairy building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4590/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 livestock & dairy building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4590/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Livestock & Dairy Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Livestock & Dairy Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Livestock & Dairy Building also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Livestock & Dairy Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 livestock & dairy building cost?

A 100×120 livestock & dairy building from Steel and Stud starts at $220,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4590/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 livestock & dairy building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud livestock & dairy building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 livestock & dairy building?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud livestock & dairy building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 livestock & dairy building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 livestock & dairy building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 livestock & dairy building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4590/month on a 100×120 livestock & dairy building.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 livestock & dairy building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 livestock & dairy building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×120 livestock & dairy building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Livestock & Dairy Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$220,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building | Steel and Stud — From $220,300
12
100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$251,150$220,300SAVE $30,850
or $4590/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Livestock & Dairy Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

Dairy operators and feedlot managers use 100×120 to house 80-120 head with feed alley, milking parlor, and a maternity pen under one roof. Open ridge venting and sidewall curtains are spec'd in the customize step, and.

You're viewing:Livestock & Dairy Building·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$220,300$251,150Save $30,850
or as low as $4590/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$202,000
100×120
this size
$220,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Ridge Vent
  • Concrete Kneewall
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-LIVESTOCK-DAIRY-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your production livestock barn.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Ridge vent + sidewall curtains for tunnel airflow. Dairy operators and feedlot managers use 100×120 to house 80-120 head with feed alley, milking parlor, and a maternity pen under one roof.

Housing rows / free stallsCENTER FEED DRIVEMilk room / handling + office100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · production livestock barn

Housing rows / free stalls · Center feed drive · Milk room / handling + office

Housing rows / free stalls at the front, center feed drive in the middle, milk room / handling + office at the rear. Capacity: 120 head production capacity. Open ridge venting and sidewall curtains are spec'd in the customize step, and concrete kneewalls with steel above protect the lower panels.

💡 Pro tip:Livestock-Ready Vent. Size affords: curtain sidewalls, handling chute wing, manure alley.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Livestock & Dairy Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Livestock & Dairy Building spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Livestock & Dairy Building.

DAILY USEEveryday livestock & dairy building
Everyday livestock & dairy building
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a livestock & dairy building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlivestock & dairy building + seasonal storage
livestock & dairy building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4590/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 livestock & dairy building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4590/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Livestock & Dairy Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Livestock & Dairy Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Livestock & Dairy Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Livestock & Dairy Building also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Livestock & Dairy Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 livestock & dairy building cost?

A 100×120 livestock & dairy building from Steel and Stud starts at $220,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4590/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 livestock & dairy building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud livestock & dairy building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 livestock & dairy building?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud livestock & dairy building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 livestock & dairy building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 livestock & dairy building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 livestock & dairy building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4590/month on a 100×120 livestock & dairy building.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 livestock & dairy building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 livestock & dairy building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×120 livestock & dairy building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Livestock & Dairy Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$220,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center | Steel and Stud — From $221,900
12
100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,950$221,900SAVE $31,050
or $4623/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Truck & Fleet Service Center
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Fleet operators spec 100×120 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers. The 100-foot length fits a tractor-trailer plus tool cabinets and a parts mezzanine. Spec.

You're viewing:Truck & Fleet Service Center·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,900$252,950Save $31,050
or as low as $4623/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,600
100×120
this size
$221,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Pull-Through Bays
  • 14x14 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-TRUCK-FLEET-SERVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. Fleet operators spec 100×120 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers.

7 maintenance baysWASH BAY + FUELING APRONParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays. The 100-foot length fits a tractor-trailer plus tool cabinets and a parts mezzanine.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Service. Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck & Fleet Service Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck & Fleet Service Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck & Fleet Service Center.

DAILY USEEveryday truck & fleet service center
Everyday truck & fleet service center
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck & fleet service center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
truck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4623/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 truck & fleet service center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4623/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck & Fleet Service Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck & Fleet Service Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck & Fleet Service Center also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck & Fleet Service Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 truck & fleet service center cost?

A 100×120 truck & fleet service center from Steel and Stud starts at $221,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4623/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 truck & fleet service center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 truck & fleet service center?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 truck & fleet service center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 truck & fleet service center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 truck & fleet service center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4623/month on a 100×120 truck & fleet service center.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 truck & fleet service center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 truck & fleet service center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×120 truck & fleet service center handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×120 truck & fleet service center ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck & Fleet Service Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center | Steel and Stud — From $221,900
12
100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,950$221,900SAVE $31,050
or $4623/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Truck & Fleet Service Center
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Fleet operators spec 100×120 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers. The 100-foot length fits a tractor-trailer plus tool cabinets and a parts mezzanine. Spec.

You're viewing:Truck & Fleet Service Center·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,900$252,950Save $31,050
or as low as $4623/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,600
100×120
this size
$221,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Pull-Through Bays
  • 14x14 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-TRUCK-FLEET-SERVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. Fleet operators spec 100×120 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers.

7 maintenance baysWASH BAY + FUELING APRONParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays. The 100-foot length fits a tractor-trailer plus tool cabinets and a parts mezzanine.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Service. Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck & Fleet Service Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck & Fleet Service Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck & Fleet Service Center.

DAILY USEEveryday truck & fleet service center
Everyday truck & fleet service center
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck & fleet service center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
truck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4623/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 truck & fleet service center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4623/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck & Fleet Service Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Truck & Fleet Service Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck & Fleet Service Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck & Fleet Service Center also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck & Fleet Service Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 truck & fleet service center cost?

A 100×120 truck & fleet service center from Steel and Stud starts at $221,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4623/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 truck & fleet service center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 truck & fleet service center?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 truck & fleet service center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 truck & fleet service center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 truck & fleet service center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4623/month on a 100×120 truck & fleet service center.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 truck & fleet service center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 truck & fleet service center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×120 truck & fleet service center handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×120 truck & fleet service center ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck & Fleet Service Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Distribution Warehouse

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Distribution Warehouse | Steel and Stud — From $221,500
12
100×120 Distribution Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Distribution Warehouse
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Distribution Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile distribution. The 100-foot clear span fits two 12-bay racking aisles plus a turning lane for 53-foot trailers, and 24-foot eaves give you.

You're viewing:Distribution Warehouse·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,200
100×120
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 24' Eaves
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-DISTRIBUTION-WARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile distribution.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~240 pallet positions, full forklift ops. The 100-foot clear span fits two 12-bay racking aisles plus a turning lane for 53-foot trailers, and 24-foot eaves give you stack height for three pallets vertically.

💡 Pro tip:Dock-Ready Layout. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Distribution Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Warehouse spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution warehouse
Everyday distribution warehouse
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution warehouse + seasonal storage
distribution warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Distribution Warehouse — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 distribution warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Distribution Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Distribution Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Warehouse also viewed:

🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 distribution warehouse cost?

A 100×120 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 distribution warehouse price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud distribution warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 distribution warehouse?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 distribution warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 distribution warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 distribution warehouse without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 100×120 distribution warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 distribution warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 distribution warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×120 distribution warehouse meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Distribution Warehouse

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Distribution Warehouse | Steel and Stud — From $221,500
12
100×120 Distribution Warehouse
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Distribution Warehouse
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Distribution Warehouse, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile distribution. The 100-foot clear span fits two 12-bay racking aisles plus a turning lane for 53-foot trailers, and 24-foot eaves give you.

You're viewing:Distribution Warehouse·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,200
100×120
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 24' Eaves
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-DISTRIBUTION-WARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your distribution facility.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Column-free clear span; 18-ft+ height for 5-tier racking. Logistics operators spec this footprint for regional cross-dock and last-mile distribution.

Multi-dock loading baysHIGH-BAY RACKING AISLESOffice mezzanine + Break + Restrooms100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · distribution facility

Multi-dock loading bays · High-bay racking aisles · Office mezzanine + Break + Restrooms

Multi-dock loading bays at the front, high-bay racking aisles in the middle, office mezzanine + break + restrooms at the rear. Capacity: ~240 pallet positions, full forklift ops. The 100-foot clear span fits two 12-bay racking aisles plus a turning lane for 53-foot trailers, and 24-foot eaves give you stack height for three pallets vertically.

💡 Pro tip:Dock-Ready Layout. Size affords: multiple dock doors, mezzanine office, in-rack sprinklers.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Distribution Warehouse in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Warehouse.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Warehouse spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Warehouse.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution warehouse
Everyday distribution warehouse
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution warehouse.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution warehouse + seasonal storage
distribution warehouse + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Distribution Warehouse — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 distribution warehouse is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Warehouse shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Distribution Warehouse buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Distribution Warehouse

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Warehouse · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Warehouse also viewed:

🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Warehouse questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 distribution warehouse cost?

A 100×120 distribution warehouse from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 distribution warehouse price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud distribution warehouse ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 distribution warehouse?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution warehouse different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 distribution warehouse need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 distribution warehouse delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 distribution warehouse without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 100×120 distribution warehouse.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 distribution warehouse?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 distribution warehouse in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×120 distribution warehouse meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Warehouse quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Self-Storage Facility

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $221,500
12
100×120 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Self-Storage Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Self-storage developers carve this footprint into 60-80 climate-controlled units with a central drive aisle. Pre-framed openings on 10-foot centers along both long walls let you drop interior partitions per your unit.

You're viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,200
100×120
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • Climate-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your storage-facility layout.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Drive-through aisle lets tenants load out of the weather. Self-storage developers carve this footprint into 60-80 climate-controlled units with a central drive aisle.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Multiple unit rowsDrive-thru loading aisleOffice + climate wing + security100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · storage-facility layout

Multiple unit rows · Drive-thru loading aisle · Office + climate wing + security

Multiple unit rows at the front, drive-thru loading aisle in the middle, office + climate wing + security at the rear. Capacity: ~90 units incl. drive-thru access. Pre-framed openings on 10-foot centers along both long walls let you drop interior partitions per your unit mix.

💡 Pro tip:60-80 Unit Capacity. Size affords: drive-thru aisle, climate zone, office/apartment.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Self-Storage Facility — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 self-storage facility cost?

A 100×120 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 self-storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 100×120 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×120 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Self-Storage Facility

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $221,500
12
100×120 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Self-Storage Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Self-storage developers carve this footprint into 60-80 climate-controlled units with a central drive aisle. Pre-framed openings on 10-foot centers along both long walls let you drop interior partitions per your unit.

You're viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,200
100×120
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • Climate-Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your storage-facility layout.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Drive-through aisle lets tenants load out of the weather. Self-storage developers carve this footprint into 60-80 climate-controlled units with a central drive aisle.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Multiple unit rowsDrive-thru loading aisleOffice + climate wing + security100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · storage-facility layout

Multiple unit rows · Drive-thru loading aisle · Office + climate wing + security

Multiple unit rows at the front, drive-thru loading aisle in the middle, office + climate wing + security at the rear. Capacity: ~90 units incl. drive-thru access. Pre-framed openings on 10-foot centers along both long walls let you drop interior partitions per your unit mix.

💡 Pro tip:60-80 Unit Capacity. Size affords: drive-thru aisle, climate zone, office/apartment.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Self-Storage Facility — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 self-storage facility cost?

A 100×120 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 self-storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 100×120 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×120 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility | Steel and Stud — From $221,600
12
100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,600$221,600SAVE $31,000
or $4617/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Sports & Recreation Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility, engineered to code for assembly use.

Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages, or pickleball courts at this footprint. 12,000 sq ft fits four full pickleball courts plus spectator seating, or a regulation basketball.

You're viewing:Sports & Recreation Facility·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,600$252,600Save $31,000
or as low as $4617/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,300
100×120
this size
$221,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 24' Eaves
  • Skylights
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-SPORTS-RECREATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your indoor sports complex.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Column-free at full width for tournament layouts. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages, or pickleball courts at this footprint.

6-court gridTURF / MULTI-SPORT ZONELobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · indoor sports complex

6-court grid · Turf / multi-sport zone · Lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing

6-court grid at the front, turf / multi-sport zone in the middle, lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing at the rear. Capacity: 6 courts + turf training zone. 12,000 sq ft fits four full pickleball courts plus spectator seating, or a regulation basketball half-court with a turf practice area.

💡 Pro tip:Court-Height Clearance. Size affords: mezzanine viewing, locker rooms, pro shop.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Sports & Recreation Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Sports & Recreation Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Sports & Recreation Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday sports & recreation facility
Everyday sports & recreation facility
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a sports & recreation facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
sports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4617/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 sports & recreation facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4617/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Sports & Recreation Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Sports & Recreation Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Sports & Recreation Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Sports & Recreation Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 sports & recreation facility cost?

A 100×120 sports & recreation facility from Steel and Stud starts at $221,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4617/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 sports & recreation facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 sports & recreation facility?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 sports & recreation facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 sports & recreation facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 sports & recreation facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4617/month on a 100×120 sports & recreation facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 sports & recreation facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 sports & recreation facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×120 sports & recreation facility pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Sports & Recreation Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$221,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility | Steel and Stud — From $221,600
12
100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,600$221,600SAVE $31,000
or $4617/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Sports & Recreation Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility, engineered to code for assembly use.

Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages, or pickleball courts at this footprint. 12,000 sq ft fits four full pickleball courts plus spectator seating, or a regulation basketball.

You're viewing:Sports & Recreation Facility·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,600$252,600Save $31,000
or as low as $4617/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,300
100×120
this size
$221,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 24' Eaves
  • Skylights
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-SPORTS-RECREATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your indoor sports complex.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Column-free at full width for tournament layouts. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages, or pickleball courts at this footprint.

6-court gridTURF / MULTI-SPORT ZONELobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · indoor sports complex

6-court grid · Turf / multi-sport zone · Lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing

6-court grid at the front, turf / multi-sport zone in the middle, lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing at the rear. Capacity: 6 courts + turf training zone. 12,000 sq ft fits four full pickleball courts plus spectator seating, or a regulation basketball half-court with a turf practice area.

💡 Pro tip:Court-Height Clearance. Size affords: mezzanine viewing, locker rooms, pro shop.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Sports & Recreation Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Sports & Recreation Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Sports & Recreation Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday sports & recreation facility
Everyday sports & recreation facility
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a sports & recreation facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
sports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4617/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 sports & recreation facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4617/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Sports & Recreation Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Sports & Recreation Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Sports & Recreation Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Sports & Recreation Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×120

Retail & Showroom

100×120 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Sports & Recreation Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 sports & recreation facility cost?

A 100×120 sports & recreation facility from Steel and Stud starts at $221,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4617/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 sports & recreation facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 sports & recreation facility?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 sports & recreation facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 sports & recreation facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 sports & recreation facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4617/month on a 100×120 sports & recreation facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 sports & recreation facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 sports & recreation facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×120 sports & recreation facility pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Sports & Recreation Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×120 Retail & Showroom

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Retail & Showroom | Steel and Stud — From $221,500
12
100×120 Retail & Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Retail & Showroom
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Retail & Showroom, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service write-up area. Storefront glazing across one long wall, two 100×120 roll-ups.

You're viewing:Retail & Showroom·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,200
100×120
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Storefront Glass
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service write-up area.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~7200 sf showroom, 3600 sf stock. Storefront glazing across one long wall, two 100×120 roll-ups for vehicle moves, and wainscoting on the lower 4 feet give it curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Showroom Curb Appeal. Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Retail & Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail & Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail & Showroom spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail & Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail & showroom
Everyday retail & showroom
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail & showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail & showroom + seasonal storage
retail & showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Retail & Showroom — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 retail & showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail & Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Retail & Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Retail & Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Retail & Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail & Showroom also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail & Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 retail & showroom cost?

A 100×120 retail & showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 retail & showroom price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud retail & showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 retail & showroom?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail & showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 retail & showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 retail & showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 retail & showroom without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 100×120 retail & showroom.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 retail & showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 retail & showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×120 retail & showroom meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Retail & Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×120 Retail & Showroom

12,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 120′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×120 steel building delivers 12,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×120 Retail & Showroom | Steel and Stud — From $221,500
12
100×120 Retail & Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$252,500$221,500SAVE $31,000
or $4615/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×120Retail & Showroom
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×120 Retail & Showroom, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service write-up area. Storefront glazing across one long wall, two 100×120 roll-ups.

You're viewing:Retail & Showroom·Size100×120·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$221,500$252,500Save $31,000
or as low as $4615/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×120
100×110
smaller
$203,200
100×120
this size
$221,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 12,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Storefront Glass
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X120-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

100 feet wide × 120 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service write-up area.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE100′ × 120′ · 12,000 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~7200 sf showroom, 3600 sf stock. Storefront glazing across one long wall, two 100×120 roll-ups for vehicle moves, and wainscoting on the lower 4 feet give it curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Showroom Curb Appeal. Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×120 Retail & Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail & Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
12,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×120 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail & Showroom spec sheet.

Width100'
Length120' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space12,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail & Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail & showroom
Everyday retail & showroom
12,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail & showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail & showroom + seasonal storage
retail & showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×120 Retail & Showroom — what makes it different.

12,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4615/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×120 retail & showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4615/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×120?

12,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 120′ footprint with 12,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $96,000–$144,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail & Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×120 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×120 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×120 Retail & Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×120 Retail & Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Retail & Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×121×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$54,000+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail & Showroom also viewed:

🏢 100×120

Distribution Warehouse

100×120 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×120

Manufacturing Facility

100×120 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×120

Commercial Workshop

100×120 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×120

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×120 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×120

Aircraft Hangar

100×120 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×120

Cold Storage Facility

100×120 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🎯 100×120

Indoor Riding Arena

100×120 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$219,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏭 100×120

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×120 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×120

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×120 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
🌾 100×120

Livestock & Dairy Building

100×120 livestock & dairy building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$220,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Livestock & Dairy Building →
🏢 100×120

Self-Storage Facility

100×120 self-storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$221,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Self-Storage Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail & Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 100×120 retail & showroom cost?

A 100×120 retail & showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $221,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4615/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×120 retail & showroom price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud retail & showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×120 retail & showroom?

Almost always for 12,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail & showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×120 retail & showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×120 retail & showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×120 retail & showroom without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4615/month on a 100×120 retail & showroom.

What warranty comes with the 100×120 retail & showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×120 retail & showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×120 retail & showroom meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Retail & Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$221,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Aircraft Hangar

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud — From $240,550
12
100×150 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,250$240,550SAVE $33,700
or $5011/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Aircraft Hangar
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Aircraft Hangar, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant aircraft hangar space. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint. The 100-foot opening accommodates a King Air or Citation.

You're viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,550$274,250Save $33,700
or as low as $5011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×150
this size
$240,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Bifold Door
  • 24' Eaves
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered for column-free clear span at 100ft width. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant aircraft hangar space.

Multi-aircraft floorMaintenance / engine zoneOffice + parts + pilot lounge100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · multi-aircraft hangar

Multi-aircraft floor · Maintenance / engine zone · Office + parts + pilot lounge

Multi-aircraft floor at the front, maintenance / engine zone in the middle, office + parts + pilot lounge at the rear. Capacity: 2-4 aircraft, full FBO operations. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint.

💡 Pro tip:FAA-Ready Drawings. Size affords: overhead crane, office mezzanine, parts storage cage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Aircraft Hangar — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×150 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $240,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 aircraft hangar price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5011/month on a 100×150 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×150 aircraft hangar meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$240,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Aircraft Hangar

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud — From $240,550
12
100×150 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,250$240,550SAVE $33,700
or $5011/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Aircraft Hangar
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Aircraft Hangar, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant aircraft hangar space. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint. The 100-foot opening accommodates a King Air or Citation.

You're viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,550$274,250Save $33,700
or as low as $5011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×150
this size
$240,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Bifold Door
  • 24' Eaves
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered for column-free clear span at 100ft width. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant aircraft hangar space.

Multi-aircraft floorMaintenance / engine zoneOffice + parts + pilot lounge100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · multi-aircraft hangar

Multi-aircraft floor · Maintenance / engine zone · Office + parts + pilot lounge

Multi-aircraft floor at the front, maintenance / engine zone in the middle, office + parts + pilot lounge at the rear. Capacity: 2-4 aircraft, full FBO operations. Private operators hangar light twins, turboprops, and small jets in this footprint.

💡 Pro tip:FAA-Ready Drawings. Size affords: overhead crane, office mezzanine, parts storage cage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Aircraft Hangar — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×150 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $240,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 aircraft hangar price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5011/month on a 100×150 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×150 aircraft hangar meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$240,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Commercial Workshop

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $240,550
12
100×150 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,250$240,550SAVE $33,700
or $5011/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Commercial Workshop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Commercial Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial workshop space. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×150 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door. It's a.

You're viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,550$274,250Save $33,700
or as low as $5011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×150
this size
$240,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 4-Bay Layout
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial workshop space.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×150 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door.

💡 Pro tip:Multi-Tenant Ready. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Commercial Workshop — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 commercial workshop cost?

A 100×150 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $240,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 commercial workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5011/month on a 100×150 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×150 commercial workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$240,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Commercial Workshop

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud — From $240,550
12
100×150 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,250$240,550SAVE $33,700
or $5011/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Commercial Workshop
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Commercial Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial workshop space. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×150 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door. It's a.

You're viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,550$274,250Save $33,700
or as low as $5011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×150
this size
$240,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 4-Bay Layout
  • Pre-Framed Openings
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-station shop.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Separates dusty + clean operations. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant commercial workshop space.

Wood + metal benchesCNC / TABLE-SAW CENTERFinishing room + Material storage100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · multi-station shop

Wood + metal benches · CNC / table-saw center · Finishing room + Material storage

Wood + metal benches at the front, cnc / table-saw center in the middle, finishing room + material storage at the rear. Capacity: multi-craft shop / small business. Multi-tenant commercial real estate developers split this footprint into four 100×150 bays, each with its own roll-up and walk-in door.

💡 Pro tip:Multi-Tenant Ready. Size affords: CNC table, paint booth, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Commercial Workshop — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 commercial workshop cost?

A 100×150 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $240,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 commercial workshop price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5011/month on a 100×150 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×150 commercial workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$240,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center | Steel and Stud — From $240,950
12
100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,700$240,950SAVE $33,750
or $5020/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Truck & Fleet Service Center
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck & fleet service center space. Fleet operators spec 100×150 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers. The 100-foot.

You're viewing:Truck & Fleet Service Center·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,950$274,700Save $33,750
or as low as $5020/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,900
100×150
this size
$240,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Pull-Through Bays
  • 14x14 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-TRUCK-FLEET-SERVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck & fleet service center space.

7 maintenance baysWASH BAY + FUELING APRONParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays. Fleet operators spec 100×150 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Service. Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck & Fleet Service Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck & Fleet Service Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck & Fleet Service Center.

DAILY USEEveryday truck & fleet service center
Everyday truck & fleet service center
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck & fleet service center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
truck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5020/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 truck & fleet service center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5020/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck & Fleet Service Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck & Fleet Service Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck & Fleet Service Center also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck & Fleet Service Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 truck & fleet service center cost?

A 100×150 truck & fleet service center from Steel and Stud starts at $240,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5020/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 truck & fleet service center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 truck & fleet service center?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 truck & fleet service center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 truck & fleet service center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 truck & fleet service center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5020/month on a 100×150 truck & fleet service center.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 truck & fleet service center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 truck & fleet service center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 truck & fleet service center handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×150 truck & fleet service center ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck & Fleet Service Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$240,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center | Steel and Stud — From $240,950
12
100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,700$240,950SAVE $33,750
or $5020/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Truck & Fleet Service Center
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck & fleet service center space. Fleet operators spec 100×150 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers. The 100-foot.

You're viewing:Truck & Fleet Service Center·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,950$274,700Save $33,750
or as low as $5020/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,900
100×150
this size
$240,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Pull-Through Bays
  • 14x14 Roll-Ups
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-TRUCK-FLEET-SERVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your fleet service center.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Drive-through lanes keep vehicles moving one direction. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck & fleet service center space.

7 maintenance baysWASH BAY + FUELING APRONParts warehouse + dispatch + crew room100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · fleet service center

7 maintenance bays · Wash bay + fueling apron · Parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room

7 maintenance bays at the front, wash bay + fueling apron in the middle, parts warehouse + dispatch + crew room at the rear. Capacity: full fleet maintenance, 7+ bays. Fleet operators spec 100×150 for a 6-bay heavy-duty service shop with pull-through bays for tractors and 53-foot trailers.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through Service. Size affords: drive-through bays, overhead lube system, parts mezzanine.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck & Fleet Service Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck & Fleet Service Center spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck & Fleet Service Center.

DAILY USEEveryday truck & fleet service center
Everyday truck & fleet service center
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck & fleet service center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
truck & fleet service center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5020/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 truck & fleet service center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5020/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck & Fleet Service Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Truck & Fleet Service Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck & Fleet Service Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck & Fleet Service Center also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck & Fleet Service Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 truck & fleet service center cost?

A 100×150 truck & fleet service center from Steel and Stud starts at $240,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5020/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 truck & fleet service center price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 truck & fleet service center?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck & fleet service center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 truck & fleet service center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 truck & fleet service center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 truck & fleet service center without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5020/month on a 100×150 truck & fleet service center.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 truck & fleet service center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 truck & fleet service center in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 truck & fleet service center handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×150 truck & fleet service center ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck & Fleet Service Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$240,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Cold Storage Facility

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Cold Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $240,950
12
100×150 Cold Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,700$240,950SAVE $33,750
or $5020/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Cold Storage Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Cold Storage Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×150 cold storage facility packs 15000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs).

You're viewing:Cold Storage Facility·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,950$274,700Save $33,750
or as low as $5020/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,900
100×150
this size
$240,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • IMP Walls
  • Vapor-Sealed
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-COLD-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your cold-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. 16-ft clear height for racked cold storage. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×150 cold storage facility packs 15000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Freezer + cooler baysStaging / breakroom + compressor roomDock-height loading100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · cold-storage facility

Freezer + cooler bays · Staging / breakroom + compressor room · Dock-height loading

Freezer + cooler bays at the front, staging / breakroom + compressor room in the middle, dock-height loading at the rear. Capacity: ~250 pallet positions across temp zones. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs) on this footprint for refrigerated and freezer storage.

💡 Pro tip:Refrigeration-Ready. Size affords: multiple temp zones, dock levelers, glycol/ammonia pad.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Cold Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage facility
Everyday cold storage facility
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage facility + seasonal storage
cold storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Cold Storage Facility — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5020/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 cold storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5020/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Cold Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Cold Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 cold storage facility cost?

A 100×150 cold storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $240,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5020/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 cold storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud cold storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 cold storage facility?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 cold storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 cold storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 cold storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5020/month on a 100×150 cold storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 cold storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 cold storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 cold storage facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×150 cold storage facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$240,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Cold Storage Facility

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Cold Storage Facility | Steel and Stud — From $240,950
12
100×150 Cold Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,700$240,950SAVE $33,750
or $5020/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Cold Storage Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Cold Storage Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×150 cold storage facility packs 15000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs).

You're viewing:Cold Storage Facility·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,950$274,700Save $33,750
or as low as $5020/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,900
100×150
this size
$240,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • IMP Walls
  • Vapor-Sealed
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-COLD-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your cold-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. 16-ft clear height for racked cold storage. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×150 cold storage facility packs 15000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Freezer + cooler baysStaging / breakroom + compressor roomDock-height loading100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · cold-storage facility

Freezer + cooler bays · Staging / breakroom + compressor room · Dock-height loading

Freezer + cooler bays at the front, staging / breakroom + compressor room in the middle, dock-height loading at the rear. Capacity: ~250 pallet positions across temp zones. Food distributors and produce operators spec insulated metal panels (IMPs) on this footprint for refrigerated and freezer storage.

💡 Pro tip:Refrigeration-Ready. Size affords: multiple temp zones, dock levelers, glycol/ammonia pad.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Cold Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage facility
Everyday cold storage facility
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage facility + seasonal storage
cold storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Cold Storage Facility — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5020/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 cold storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5020/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Cold Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Cold Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 cold storage facility cost?

A 100×150 cold storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $240,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5020/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 cold storage facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud cold storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 cold storage facility?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 cold storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 cold storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 cold storage facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5020/month on a 100×150 cold storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 cold storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 cold storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 cold storage facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×150 cold storage facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request — call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$240,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Retail & Showroom

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Retail & Showroom | Steel and Stud — From $240,550
12
100×150 Retail & Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,250$240,550SAVE $33,700
or $5011/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Retail & Showroom
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Retail & Showroom, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant retail & showroom space. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service.

You're viewing:Retail & Showroom·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,550$274,250Save $33,700
or as low as $5011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×150
this size
$240,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Storefront Glass
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant retail & showroom space.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~9000 sf showroom, 4500 sf stock. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service write-up area.

💡 Pro tip:Showroom Curb Appeal. Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Retail & Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail & Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail & Showroom spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail & Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail & showroom
Everyday retail & showroom
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail & showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail & showroom + seasonal storage
retail & showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Retail & Showroom — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 retail & showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail & Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Retail & Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Retail & Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Retail & Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail & Showroom also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail & Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 retail & showroom cost?

A 100×150 retail & showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $240,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 retail & showroom price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud retail & showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 retail & showroom?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail & showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 retail & showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 retail & showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 retail & showroom without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5011/month on a 100×150 retail & showroom.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 retail & showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 retail & showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×150 retail & showroom meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Retail & Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$240,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Retail & Showroom

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Retail & Showroom | Steel and Stud — From $240,550
12
100×150 Retail & Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,250$240,550SAVE $33,700
or $5011/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Retail & Showroom
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Retail & Showroom, engineered for code-compliant business use.

100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant retail & showroom space. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service.

You're viewing:Retail & Showroom·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,550$274,250Save $33,700
or as low as $5011/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,500
100×150
this size
$240,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Storefront Glass
  • Wainscoting
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-RETAIL-SHOWROOMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your big-box showroom.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered storefront glazing + side loading dock. 100×150 delivers 15000 sq ft of code-compliant retail & showroom space.

Full-glass storefrontShowroom + Demo floorSTOCKROOM + RECEIVING + OFFICE100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · big-box showroom

Full-glass storefront · Showroom + Demo floor · Stockroom + Receiving + Office

Full-glass storefront at the front, showroom + demo floor in the middle, stockroom + receiving + office at the rear. Capacity: ~9000 sf showroom, 4500 sf stock. Commercial real estate buyers building auto, RV, or boat showrooms use this size to display 30+ vehicles with a customer lounge and service write-up area.

💡 Pro tip:Showroom Curb Appeal. Size affords: mezzanine office, loading dock, multiple POS stations.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Retail & Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Retail & Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Retail & Showroom spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Retail & Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday retail & showroom
Everyday retail & showroom
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a retail & showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWretail & showroom + seasonal storage
retail & showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Retail & Showroom — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5011/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 retail & showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5011/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Retail & Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Retail & Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Retail & Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Retail & Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Retail & Showroom also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Retail & Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 retail & showroom cost?

A 100×150 retail & showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $240,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5011/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 retail & showroom price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud retail & showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 retail & showroom?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud retail & showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 retail & showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 retail & showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 retail & showroom without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5011/month on a 100×150 retail & showroom.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 retail & showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 retail & showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×150 retail & showroom meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Retail & Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$240,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn | Steel and Stud — From $239,350
12
100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$272,850$239,350SAVE $33,500
or $4986/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Equipment & Hay Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 100×150 equipment & hay barn fits 100-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. 100×150 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space.

You're viewing:Equipment & Hay Barn·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$239,350$272,850Save $33,500
or as low as $4986/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$220,300
100×150
this size
$239,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Gable
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-EQUIPMENT-HAY-BABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commodity hay barn.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Open gables vent moisture off fresh-cut hay. Our 100×150 equipment & hay barn fits 100-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

High-stack bale storageEQUIPMENT ALLEYGrain / feed room + scale100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · commodity hay barn

High-stack bale storage · Equipment alley · Grain / feed room + scale

High-stack bale storage at the front, equipment alley in the middle, grain / feed room + scale at the rear. Capacity: ~2,811 sq bales at 3-high — telehandler stackable higher. 100×150 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through. Size affords: telehandler-height stacking, commodity bays, truck scale apron.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment & Hay Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment & Hay Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment & Hay Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment & hay barn
Everyday equipment & hay barn
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment & hay barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
equipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4986/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 equipment & hay barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4986/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment & Hay Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment & Hay Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment & Hay Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment & Hay Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 equipment & hay barn cost?

A 100×150 equipment & hay barn from Steel and Stud starts at $239,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4986/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 equipment & hay barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 equipment & hay barn?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 equipment & hay barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 equipment & hay barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 equipment & hay barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4986/month on a 100×150 equipment & hay barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 equipment & hay barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 equipment & hay barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 equipment & hay barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment & Hay Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$239,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn | Steel and Stud — From $239,350
12
100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$272,850$239,350SAVE $33,500
or $4986/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Equipment & Hay Barn
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 100×150 equipment & hay barn fits 100-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. 100×150 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space.

You're viewing:Equipment & Hay Barn·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$239,350$272,850Save $33,500
or as low as $4986/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$220,300
100×150
this size
$239,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Gable
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-EQUIPMENT-HAY-BABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your commodity hay barn.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Open gables vent moisture off fresh-cut hay. Our 100×150 equipment & hay barn fits 100-foot widths and 150-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

High-stack bale storageEQUIPMENT ALLEYGrain / feed room + scale100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · commodity hay barn

High-stack bale storage · Equipment alley · Grain / feed room + scale

High-stack bale storage at the front, equipment alley in the middle, grain / feed room + scale at the rear. Capacity: ~2,811 sq bales at 3-high — telehandler stackable higher. 100×150 delivers 12500 sq ft of rugged equipment & hay barn space.

💡 Pro tip:Drive-Through. Size affords: telehandler-height stacking, commodity bays, truck scale apron.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equipment & Hay Barn.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equipment & Hay Barn spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equipment & Hay Barn.

DAILY USEEveryday equipment & hay barn
Everyday equipment & hay barn
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equipment & hay barn.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
equipment & hay barn + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4986/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 equipment & hay barn is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4986/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equipment & Hay Barn shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Equipment & Hay Barn

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equipment & Hay Barn · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equipment & Hay Barn also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equipment & Hay Barn questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 equipment & hay barn cost?

A 100×150 equipment & hay barn from Steel and Stud starts at $239,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4986/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 equipment & hay barn price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 equipment & hay barn?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equipment & hay barn different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 equipment & hay barn need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 equipment & hay barn delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 equipment & hay barn without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4986/month on a 100×150 equipment & hay barn.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 equipment & hay barn?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 equipment & hay barn in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 equipment & hay barn stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equipment & Hay Barn quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$239,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Indoor Riding Arena | Steel and Stud — From $239,350
12
100×150 Indoor Riding Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$272,850$239,350SAVE $33,500
or $4986/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Indoor Riding Arena
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena, built for farm and ranch demands.

Large indoor riding arena with mounted-rider clearance, kickwall reinforcement up to 8 feet, and a side lean-to for tack rooms or stalls. Galvanized framing handles ammonia and humidity from year-round equine use.

You're viewing:Indoor Riding Arena·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$239,350$272,850Save $33,500
or as low as $4986/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$220,300
100×150
this size
$239,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Up to 20’+ Tall
  • Kickwall Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full riding arena.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered clear-span trusses, no interior columns. Large indoor riding arena with mounted-rider clearance, kickwall reinforcement up to 8 feet, and a side lean-to for tack rooms or stalls.

Competition-size riding floorRAIL + SPECTATOR LANEAttached stalls + tack wing100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · full riding arena

Competition-size riding floor · Rail + spectator lane · Attached stalls + tack wing

Competition-size riding floor at the front, rail + spectator lane in the middle, attached stalls + tack wing at the rear. Capacity: 100×150 clear span — jumping + dressage work. Galvanized framing handles ammonia and humidity from year-round equine use.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: attached stable wing, judge stand, sprinkler dust control.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena
Everyday indoor riding arena
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4986/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 indoor riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4986/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Riding Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 indoor riding arena cost?

A 100×150 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $239,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4986/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 indoor riding arena price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 indoor riding arena?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 indoor riding arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 indoor riding arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 indoor riding arena without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4986/month on a 100×150 indoor riding arena.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 indoor riding arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 indoor riding arena in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 indoor riding arena stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$239,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Indoor Riding Arena | Steel and Stud — From $239,350
12
100×150 Indoor Riding Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$272,850$239,350SAVE $33,500
or $4986/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Indoor Riding Arena
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena, built for farm and ranch demands.

Large indoor riding arena with mounted-rider clearance, kickwall reinforcement up to 8 feet, and a side lean-to for tack rooms or stalls. Galvanized framing handles ammonia and humidity from year-round equine use.

You're viewing:Indoor Riding Arena·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$239,350$272,850Save $33,500
or as low as $4986/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$220,300
100×150
this size
$239,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Up to 20’+ Tall
  • Kickwall Ready
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-INDOOR-RIDING-ARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your full riding arena.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Engineered clear-span trusses, no interior columns. Large indoor riding arena with mounted-rider clearance, kickwall reinforcement up to 8 feet, and a side lean-to for tack rooms or stalls.

Competition-size riding floorRAIL + SPECTATOR LANEAttached stalls + tack wing100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · full riding arena

Competition-size riding floor · Rail + spectator lane · Attached stalls + tack wing

Competition-size riding floor at the front, rail + spectator lane in the middle, attached stalls + tack wing at the rear. Capacity: 100×150 clear span — jumping + dressage work. Galvanized framing handles ammonia and humidity from year-round equine use.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: attached stable wing, judge stand, sprinkler dust control.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Riding Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Riding Arena spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Riding Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor riding arena
Everyday indoor riding arena
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor riding arena + seasonal storage
indoor riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Indoor Riding Arena — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$4986/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 indoor riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $4986/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Riding Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Indoor Riding Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Riding Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Riding Arena also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
🏛️ 100×150

Sports & Recreation Facility

100×150 sports & recreation facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Sports & Recreation Facility →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Riding Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 indoor riding arena cost?

A 100×150 indoor riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $239,350 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $4986/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 indoor riding arena price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud indoor riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 indoor riding arena?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor riding arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 indoor riding arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 indoor riding arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 indoor riding arena without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $4986/month on a 100×150 indoor riding arena.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 indoor riding arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 indoor riding arena in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 indoor riding arena stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Riding Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$239,350.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility | Steel and Stud — From $240,650
12
100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,350$240,650SAVE $33,700
or $5014/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Sports & Recreation Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility, engineered to code for assembly use.

Looking for a 100×150 sports & recreation facility? At 15000 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages.

You're viewing:Sports & Recreation Facility·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,650$274,350Save $33,700
or as low as $5014/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,600
100×150
this size
$240,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 24' Eaves
  • Skylights
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-SPORTS-RECREATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your indoor sports complex.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Column-free at full width for tournament layouts. Looking for a 100×150 sports & recreation facility? At 15000 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

8-court gridTURF / MULTI-SPORT ZONELobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · indoor sports complex

8-court grid · Turf / multi-sport zone · Lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing

8-court grid at the front, turf / multi-sport zone in the middle, lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing at the rear. Capacity: 8 courts + turf training zone. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages, or pickleball courts at this footprint.

💡 Pro tip:Court-Height Clearance. Size affords: mezzanine viewing, locker rooms, pro shop.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Sports & Recreation Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Sports & Recreation Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Sports & Recreation Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday sports & recreation facility
Everyday sports & recreation facility
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a sports & recreation facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
sports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5014/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 sports & recreation facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5014/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Sports & Recreation Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Sports & Recreation Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Sports & Recreation Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Sports & Recreation Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 sports & recreation facility cost?

A 100×150 sports & recreation facility from Steel and Stud starts at $240,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5014/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 sports & recreation facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 sports & recreation facility?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 sports & recreation facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 sports & recreation facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 sports & recreation facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5014/month on a 100×150 sports & recreation facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 sports & recreation facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 sports & recreation facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 sports & recreation facility pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Sports & Recreation Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$240,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility

15,000 sq ft for industrial warehouse, hangar, or distribution facility

100′ x 150′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×150 steel building delivers 15,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility | Steel and Stud — From $240,650
12
100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$274,350$240,650SAVE $33,700
or $5014/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings100×150Sports & Recreation Facility
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility, engineered to code for assembly use.

Looking for a 100×150 sports & recreation facility? At 15000 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages.

You're viewing:Sports & Recreation Facility·Size100×150·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$240,650$274,350Save $33,700
or as low as $5014/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×150
100×120
smaller
$221,600
100×150
this size
$240,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 15,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 24' Eaves
  • Skylights
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X150-SPORTS-RECREATIOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your indoor sports complex.

100 feet wide × 150 feet long. Column-free at full width for tournament layouts. Looking for a 100×150 sports & recreation facility? At 15000 sq ft, this footprint suits public assembly, community use, or worship space.

8-court gridTURF / MULTI-SPORT ZONELobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing100′ × 150′ · 15,000 sq ft · indoor sports complex

8-court grid · Turf / multi-sport zone · Lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing

8-court grid at the front, turf / multi-sport zone in the middle, lobby + lockers + mezzanine viewing at the rear. Capacity: 8 courts + turf training zone. Schools and parks departments build indoor practice facilities, batting cages, or pickleball courts at this footprint.

💡 Pro tip:Court-Height Clearance. Size affords: mezzanine viewing, locker rooms, pro shop.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Sports & Recreation Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
15,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×150 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Sports & Recreation Facility spec sheet.

Width100'
Length150' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space15,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Sports & Recreation Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday sports & recreation facility
Everyday sports & recreation facility
15,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a sports & recreation facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
sports & recreation facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility — what makes it different.

15,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$5014/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×150 sports & recreation facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $5014/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×150?

15,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 150′ footprint with 15,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $120,000–$180,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Sports & Recreation Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×150 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 100×150 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×150 Sports & Recreation Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Sports & Recreation Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×151×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$67,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Sports & Recreation Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×150

Distribution Warehouse

100×150 distribution warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Distribution Warehouse →
🏭 100×150

Manufacturing Facility

100×150 manufacturing facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Manufacturing Facility →
🏢 100×150

Commercial Workshop

100×150 commercial workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Workshop →
🌾 100×150

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×150 equipment & hay barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →
🏢 100×150

Aircraft Hangar

100×150 aircraft hangar configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Aircraft Hangar →
🏭 100×150

Cold Storage Facility

100×150 cold storage facility configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Cold Storage Facility →
🌾 100×150

Indoor Riding Arena

100×150 indoor riding arena configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$239,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Indoor Riding Arena →
🏢 100×150

Retail & Showroom

100×150 retail & showroom configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Retail & Showroom →
🏭 100×150

Truck & Fleet Service Center

100×150 truck & fleet service center configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$240,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Truck & Fleet Service Center →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Sports & Recreation Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×150 sports & recreation facility cost?

A 100×150 sports & recreation facility from Steel and Stud starts at $240,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $5014/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×150 sports & recreation facility price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×150 sports & recreation facility?

Almost always for 15,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud sports & recreation facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×150 sports & recreation facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×150 sports & recreation facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×150 sports & recreation facility without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $5014/month on a 100×150 sports & recreation facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×150 sports & recreation facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×150 sports & recreation facility in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×150 sports & recreation facility pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud's engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Sports & Recreation Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$240,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

16×40 Metal Carport

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×40 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×40 Metal Carport | Steel and Stud — From $9,450
12
16×40 Metal Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,750$9,450SAVE $1,300
or $197/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings16×40Metal Carport
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×40 Metal Carport, built for hobby and recreational use.

Open-sided 16×40 metal carports cover two vehicles parked end-to-end or a single travel trailer up to 36 feet. RV owners size up to 12-foot legs to clear a Class C roof with AC unit. Ground-anchored, no slab required.

You're viewing:Metal Carport·Size16×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,450$10,750Save $1,300
or as low as $197/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×40
16×40
this size
$9,450
18×40
wider
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Sides
  • 12' Legs
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X40-METAL-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your double carport layout.

16 feet wide × 40 feet long. Certified legs anchored to slab or ground. Open-sided 16×40 metal carports cover two vehicles parked end-to-end or a single travel trailer up to 36 feet.

1 side-by-side baysCenter post-free spanWalk-around clearance16′ × 40′ · 640 sq ft · double carport layout

1 side-by-side bays · Center post-free span · Walk-around clearance

1 side-by-side bays at the front, center post-free span in the middle, walk-around clearance at the rear. Capacity: 1 vehicles side by side. RV owners size up to 12-foot legs to clear a Class C roof with AC unit.

💡 Pro tip:From $9,450. Size affords: half sides, extra panel courses, lean-off storage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×40 Metal Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Carport spec sheet.

Width16'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday metal carport
Everyday metal carport
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal carport + seasonal storage
metal carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×40 Metal Carport — what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$197/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×40 metal carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $197/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×40?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 40′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 16×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×40 Metal Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×40 Metal Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Carport also viewed:

🏡 16×40

One Car Garage with Workshop

16×40 one car garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize One Car Garage with Workshop →
🏡 16×40

Metal Workshop

16×40 metal workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Workshop →
🎯 16×40

RV Cover with Storage

16×40 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🌾 16×40

Horse Tack & Feed Barn

16×40 horse tack & feed barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Tack & Feed Barn →
🌾 16×40

Equipment & Implement Storage

16×40 equipment & implement storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Implement Storage →
🏡 16×40

Detached Garage

16×40 detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage →
🎯 16×40

Hunting Cabin Shell

16×40 hunting cabin shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →
🏢 16×40

Mechanic's Shop

16×40 mechanic's shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mechanic's Shop →
🌾 16×40

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

16×40 hay & feed lean-to base configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay & Feed Lean-To Base →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 16×40 metal carport cost?

A 16×40 metal carport from Steel and Stud starts at $9,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $197/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×40 metal carport price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud metal carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×40 metal carport?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×40 metal carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×40 metal carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×40 metal carport without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $197/month on a 16×40 metal carport.

What warranty comes with the 16×40 metal carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×40 metal carport in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 16×40 metal carport for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a metal carport to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

16×40 Metal Carport

640 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

16′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×40 steel building delivers 640 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
16×40 Metal Carport | Steel and Stud — From $9,450
12
16×40 Metal Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,750$9,450SAVE $1,300
or $197/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings16×40Metal Carport
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×40 Metal Carport, built for hobby and recreational use.

Open-sided 16×40 metal carports cover two vehicles parked end-to-end or a single travel trailer up to 36 feet. RV owners size up to 12-foot legs to clear a Class C roof with AC unit. Ground-anchored, no slab required.

You're viewing:Metal Carport·Size16×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,450$10,750Save $1,300
or as low as $197/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×40
16×40
this size
$9,450
18×40
wider
$10,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 640 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Sides
  • 12' Legs
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X40-METAL-CARPORTBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your double carport layout.

16 feet wide × 40 feet long. Certified legs anchored to slab or ground. Open-sided 16×40 metal carports cover two vehicles parked end-to-end or a single travel trailer up to 36 feet.

1 side-by-side baysCenter post-free spanWalk-around clearance16′ × 40′ · 640 sq ft · double carport layout

1 side-by-side bays · Center post-free span · Walk-around clearance

1 side-by-side bays at the front, center post-free span in the middle, walk-around clearance at the rear. Capacity: 1 vehicles side by side. RV owners size up to 12-foot legs to clear a Class C roof with AC unit.

💡 Pro tip:From $9,450. Size affords: half sides, extra panel courses, lean-off storage.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×40 Metal Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
640 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Carport spec sheet.

Width16'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space640 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday metal carport
Everyday metal carport
640 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal carport + seasonal storage
metal carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×40 Metal Carport — what makes it different.

640sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$197/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×40 metal carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $197/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×40?

640 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 40′ footprint with 640 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,120–$7,680 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 16×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×40 Metal Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×40 Metal Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,880+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Carport also viewed:

🏡 16×40

One Car Garage with Workshop

16×40 one car garage with workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize One Car Garage with Workshop →
🏡 16×40

Metal Workshop

16×40 metal workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Workshop →
🎯 16×40

RV Cover with Storage

16×40 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🌾 16×40

Horse Tack & Feed Barn

16×40 horse tack & feed barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Tack & Feed Barn →
🌾 16×40

Equipment & Implement Storage

16×40 equipment & implement storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment & Implement Storage →
🏡 16×40

Detached Garage

16×40 detached garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Detached Garage →
🎯 16×40

Hunting Cabin Shell

16×40 hunting cabin shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hunting Cabin Shell →
🏢 16×40

Mechanic's Shop

16×40 mechanic's shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Mechanic's Shop →
🌾 16×40

Hay & Feed Lean-To Base

16×40 hay & feed lean-to base configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$10,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay & Feed Lean-To Base →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 16×40 metal carport cost?

A 16×40 metal carport from Steel and Stud starts at $9,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $197/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×40 metal carport price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud metal carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×40 metal carport?

Almost always for 640+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×40 metal carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×40 metal carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×40 metal carport without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $197/month on a 16×40 metal carport.

What warranty comes with the 16×40 metal carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×40 metal carport in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 16×40 metal carport for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a metal carport to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

40×48 Home Workshop & Garage

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

40′ x 48′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×48 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
40×48 Home Workshop & Garage | Steel and Stud — From $35,150
12
40×48 Home Workshop & Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$40,050$35,150SAVE $4,900
or $732/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings40×48Home Workshop & Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×48 Home Workshop & Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Hobbyists and homeowners fit three vehicles plus a full workshop with workbench, tool wall, and lift bay. The 40-foot clear span means no posts to work around when rolling out a lawn tractor or a project car. Walk-in.

You're viewing:Home Workshop & Garage·Size40×48·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$35,150$40,050Save $4,900
or as low as $732/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×48
40×48
this size
$35,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Boxed Eave Roof
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X48-HOME-WORKSHOP-GABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

40 feet wide × 48 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Hobbyists and homeowners fit three vehicles plus a full workshop with workbench, tool wall, and lift bay.

4 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay40′ × 48′ · 1,920 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

4 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

4 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 4 vehicles + full hobby shop. The 40-foot clear span means no posts to work around when rolling out a lawn tractor or a project car.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×48 Home Workshop & Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Workshop & Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×48 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Workshop & Garage spec sheet.

Width40'
Length48' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Workshop & Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday home workshop & garage
Everyday home workshop & garage
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home workshop & garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome workshop & garage + seasonal storage
home workshop & garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×48 Home Workshop & Garage — what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$732/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×48 home workshop & garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $732/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×48?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 48′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Workshop & Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×48 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 40×48 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×48 Home Workshop & Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×48 Home Workshop & Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Workshop & Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×49×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,640+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Workshop & Garage also viewed:

🏢 40×48

Three-Bay Commercial Garage

40×48 three-bay commercial garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Bay Commercial Garage →
🏢 40×48

Fabrication Shop

40×48 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 40×48

Horse Barn

40×48 horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn →
🌾 40×48

Hay & Equipment Barn

40×48 hay & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →
🏭 40×48

Fleet Garage

40×48 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 40×48

Independent Auto Repair Shop

40×48 independent auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Independent Auto Repair Shop →
🎯 40×48

RV & Boat Garage

40×48 rv & boat garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Garage →
🏛️ 40×48

Church or Community Hall

40×48 church or community hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Workshop & Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 40×48 home workshop & garage cost?

A 40×48 home workshop & garage from Steel and Stud starts at $35,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $732/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×48 home workshop & garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home workshop & garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×48 home workshop & garage?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home workshop & garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×48 home workshop & garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×48 home workshop & garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×48 home workshop & garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $732/month on a 40×48 home workshop & garage.

What warranty comes with the 40×48 home workshop & garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×48 home workshop & garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 40×48 home workshop & garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 40×48 home workshop & garage typically adds $15,360–$23,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Workshop & Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$35,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

40×48 Home Workshop & Garage

1,920 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

40′ x 48′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 40×48 steel building delivers 1,920 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
40×48 Home Workshop & Garage | Steel and Stud — From $35,150
12
40×48 Home Workshop & Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$40,050$35,150SAVE $4,900
or $732/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings40×48Home Workshop & Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

40×48 Home Workshop & Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Hobbyists and homeowners fit three vehicles plus a full workshop with workbench, tool wall, and lift bay. The 40-foot clear span means no posts to work around when rolling out a lawn tractor or a project car. Walk-in.

You're viewing:Home Workshop & Garage·Size40×48·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$35,150$40,050Save $4,900
or as low as $732/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 40×48
40×48
this size
$35,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,920 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Boxed Eave Roof
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-40X48-HOME-WORKSHOP-GABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

40 feet wide × 48 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Hobbyists and homeowners fit three vehicles plus a full workshop with workbench, tool wall, and lift bay.

4 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay40′ × 48′ · 1,920 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

4 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

4 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 4 vehicles + full hobby shop. The 40-foot clear span means no posts to work around when rolling out a lawn tractor or a project car.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 40×48 Home Workshop & Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Workshop & Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,920 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 40×48 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Workshop & Garage spec sheet.

Width40'
Length48' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,920 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Workshop & Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday home workshop & garage
Everyday home workshop & garage
1,920 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home workshop & garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome workshop & garage + seasonal storage
home workshop & garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

40×48 Home Workshop & Garage — what makes it different.

1,920sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$732/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 40×48 home workshop & garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $732/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 40×48?

1,920 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 40′ × 48′ footprint with 1,920 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $15,360–$23,040 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Workshop & Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 40×48 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 40×48 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 40×48 Home Workshop & Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 40×48 Home Workshop & Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Workshop & Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
41×49×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$8,640+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Workshop & Garage also viewed:

🏢 40×48

Three-Bay Commercial Garage

40×48 three-bay commercial garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Three-Bay Commercial Garage →
🏢 40×48

Fabrication Shop

40×48 fabrication shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fabrication Shop →
🌾 40×48

Horse Barn

40×48 horse barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Barn →
🌾 40×48

Hay & Equipment Barn

40×48 hay & equipment barn configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hay & Equipment Barn →
🏭 40×48

Fleet Garage

40×48 fleet garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Fleet Garage →
🏢 40×48

Independent Auto Repair Shop

40×48 independent auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Independent Auto Repair Shop →
🎯 40×48

RV & Boat Garage

40×48 rv & boat garage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$35,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV & Boat Garage →
🏛️ 40×48

Church or Community Hall

40×48 church or community hall configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$37,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Church or Community Hall →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Workshop & Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 40×48 home workshop & garage cost?

A 40×48 home workshop & garage from Steel and Stud starts at $35,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $732/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 40×48 home workshop & garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud home workshop & garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 40×48 home workshop & garage?

Almost always for 1,920+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home workshop & garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 40×48 home workshop & garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 40×48 home workshop & garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 40×48 home workshop & garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $732/month on a 40×48 home workshop & garage.

What warranty comes with the 40×48 home workshop & garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 40×48 home workshop & garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 40×48 home workshop & garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 40×48 home workshop & garage typically adds $15,360–$23,040 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Workshop & Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$35,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space | Steel and Stud — From $12,650
12
25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,400$12,650SAVE $1,750
or $264/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Workshop / Hobby Space
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space, built for daily backyard use.

1,000 sq ft clear-span steel workshop for woodworking, auto restoration, welding, and crafts. The wider 25-foot span gives more room for tool walls, car lifts, dust collection, and heavy benches.

You're viewing:Workshop / Hobby Space·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,650$14,400Save $1,750
or as low as $264/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$12,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From style="margin-top:18px"0,995
  • Clear Span
  • 14 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. 1,000 sq ft clear-span steel workshop for woodworking, auto restoration, welding, and crafts.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. The wider 25-foot span gives more room for tool walls, car lifts, dust collection, and heavy benches.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop / Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop / Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop / Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop / hobby space
Everyday workshop / hobby space
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop / hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop / hobby space + seasonal storage
workshop / hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$264/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 workshop / hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $264/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop / Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop / Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop / Hobby Space also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop / Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 workshop / hobby space cost?

A 25×40 workshop / hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $12,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $264/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 workshop / hobby space price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 workshop / hobby space?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 workshop / hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 workshop / hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 workshop / hobby space without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $264/month on a 25×40 workshop / hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 workshop / hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 workshop / hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×40 workshop / hobby space add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×40 workshop / hobby space typically adds $8,000–$12,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop / Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$12,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space | Steel and Stud — From $12,650
12
25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,400$12,650SAVE $1,750
or $264/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Workshop / Hobby Space
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space, built for daily backyard use.

1,000 sq ft clear-span steel workshop for woodworking, auto restoration, welding, and crafts. The wider 25-foot span gives more room for tool walls, car lifts, dust collection, and heavy benches.

You're viewing:Workshop / Hobby Space·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,650$14,400Save $1,750
or as low as $264/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$12,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From style="margin-top:18px"0,995
  • Clear Span
  • 14 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your workshop layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Side-load + walk-in, dust-collection ready. 1,000 sq ft clear-span steel workshop for woodworking, auto restoration, welding, and crafts.

Workbench wallTABLE SAW / CENTERLumber / Material rack25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · workshop layout

Workbench wall · Table saw / Center · Lumber / Material rack

Workbench wall at the front, table saw / center in the middle, lumber / material rack at the rear. Capacity: 1-person serious shop. The wider 25-foot span gives more room for tool walls, car lifts, dust collection, and heavy benches.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: dust collection, 220V subpanel, shop sink.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop / Hobby Space.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop / Hobby Space spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop / Hobby Space.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop / hobby space
Everyday workshop / hobby space
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop / hobby space.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop / hobby space + seasonal storage
workshop / hobby space + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$264/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 workshop / hobby space is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $264/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop / Hobby Space shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Workshop / Hobby Space

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop / Hobby Space · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop / Hobby Space also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop / Hobby Space questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 workshop / hobby space cost?

A 25×40 workshop / hobby space from Steel and Stud starts at $12,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $264/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 workshop / hobby space price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 workshop / hobby space?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop / hobby space different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 workshop / hobby space need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 workshop / hobby space delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 workshop / hobby space without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $264/month on a 25×40 workshop / hobby space.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 workshop / hobby space?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 workshop / hobby space in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 25×40 workshop / hobby space add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 25×40 workshop / hobby space typically adds $8,000–$12,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop / Hobby Space quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

25×40 Commercial Steel Building

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Commercial Steel Building | Steel and Stud — From $14,500
12
25×40 Commercial Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$16,550$14,500SAVE $2,050
or $302/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Commercial Steel Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×40 Commercial Steel Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Retail stores, offices, auto detailing bays, service businesses, and light warehouse use. Code-certified clear-span design with 12-gauge framing maximizes every square foot of usable space.

You're viewing:Commercial Steel Building·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,500$16,550Save $2,050
or as low as $302/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$14,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From style="margin-top:18px"4,500
  • Code Certified
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-COMMERCIAL-STEELBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your small-office layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Front client entry, rear staff entry. Retail stores, offices, auto detailing bays, service businesses, and light warehouse use.

Open desk areaPrivate office / meeting roomKITCHENETTE + FILES25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · small-office layout

Open desk area · Private office / meeting room · Kitchenette + files

Open desk area at the front, private office / meeting room in the middle, kitchenette + files at the rear. Capacity: 8 workstations. Code-certified clear-span design with 12-gauge framing maximizes every square foot of usable space.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: conference room, server closet, ADA restroom.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Commercial Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Steel Building spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial steel building
Everyday commercial steel building
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial steel building + seasonal storage
commercial steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Commercial Steel Building — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$302/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 commercial steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $302/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Commercial Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Commercial Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Steel Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Steel Building also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 commercial steel building cost?

A 25×40 commercial steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $14,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $302/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 commercial steel building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 commercial steel building?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 commercial steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 commercial steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 commercial steel building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $302/month on a 25×40 commercial steel building.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 commercial steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 commercial steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 25×40 commercial steel building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$14,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

25×40 Commercial Steel Building

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Commercial Steel Building | Steel and Stud — From $14,500
12
25×40 Commercial Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$16,550$14,500SAVE $2,050
or $302/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Commercial Steel Building
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×40 Commercial Steel Building, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Retail stores, offices, auto detailing bays, service businesses, and light warehouse use. Code-certified clear-span design with 12-gauge framing maximizes every square foot of usable space.

You're viewing:Commercial Steel Building·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$14,500$16,550Save $2,050
or as low as $302/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$14,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From style="margin-top:18px"4,500
  • Code Certified
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-COMMERCIAL-STEELBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your small-office layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Front client entry, rear staff entry. Retail stores, offices, auto detailing bays, service businesses, and light warehouse use.

Open desk areaPrivate office / meeting roomKITCHENETTE + FILES25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · small-office layout

Open desk area · Private office / meeting room · Kitchenette + files

Open desk area at the front, private office / meeting room in the middle, kitchenette + files at the rear. Capacity: 8 workstations. Code-certified clear-span design with 12-gauge framing maximizes every square foot of usable space.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: conference room, server closet, ADA restroom.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Commercial Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Steel Building spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial steel building
Everyday commercial steel building
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial steel building + seasonal storage
commercial steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Commercial Steel Building — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$302/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 commercial steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $302/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Commercial Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Commercial Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Steel Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Steel Building also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 commercial steel building cost?

A 25×40 commercial steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $14,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $302/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 commercial steel building price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud commercial steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 commercial steel building?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 commercial steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 commercial steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 commercial steel building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $302/month on a 25×40 commercial steel building.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 commercial steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 commercial steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 25×40 commercial steel building meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud's 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order — typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$14,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

25×40 Man Cave / She Shed

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Man Cave / She Shed | Steel and Stud — From $12,650
12
25×40 Man Cave / She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,400$12,650SAVE $1,750
or $264/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Man Cave / She Shed
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×40 Man Cave / She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.

Personal retreat away from the house. Game room, music studio, art workshop, lounge, or backyard studio with room to separate activity zones. Fully insulated and pre-wired for HVAC, lighting, and entertainment.

You're viewing:Man Cave / She Shed·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,650$14,400Save $1,750
or as low as $264/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$12,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From style="margin-top:18px"0,995
  • Insulated
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Plumbing wall placed for bar + bath back-to-back. Personal retreat away from the house.

Main loungeWet bar / kitchenetteBath + storage25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Wet bar / kitchenette · Bath + storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitchenette in the middle, bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: entertaining space for 40 guests. Game room, music studio, art workshop, lounge, or backyard studio with room to separate activity zones.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: wet bar, half bath, media wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Man Cave / She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave / She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave / She Shed spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave / She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave / she shed
Everyday man cave / she shed
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave / she shed + seasonal storage
man cave / she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Man Cave / She Shed — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$264/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 man cave / she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $264/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave / She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Man Cave / She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Man Cave / She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave / She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave / She Shed also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave / She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 man cave / she shed cost?

A 25×40 man cave / she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $12,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $264/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 man cave / she shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud man cave / she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 man cave / she shed?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave / she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 man cave / she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 man cave / she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 man cave / she shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $264/month on a 25×40 man cave / she shed.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 man cave / she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 man cave / she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 25×40 man cave / she shed for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave / she shed to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave / She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$12,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

25×40 Man Cave / She Shed

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Man Cave / She Shed | Steel and Stud — From $12,650
12
25×40 Man Cave / She Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$14,400$12,650SAVE $1,750
or $264/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Man Cave / She Shed
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×40 Man Cave / She Shed, built for hobby and recreational use.

Personal retreat away from the house. Game room, music studio, art workshop, lounge, or backyard studio with room to separate activity zones. Fully insulated and pre-wired for HVAC, lighting, and entertainment.

You're viewing:Man Cave / She Shed·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$12,650$14,400Save $1,750
or as low as $264/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$12,650
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From style="margin-top:18px"0,995
  • Insulated
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-MAN-CAVE-SHE-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your finished retreat layout.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Plumbing wall placed for bar + bath back-to-back. Personal retreat away from the house.

Main loungeWet bar / kitchenetteBath + storage25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · finished retreat layout

Main lounge · Wet bar / kitchenette · Bath + storage

Main lounge at the front, wet bar / kitchenette in the middle, bath + storage at the rear. Capacity: entertaining space for 40 guests. Game room, music studio, art workshop, lounge, or backyard studio with room to separate activity zones.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: wet bar, half bath, media wall.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Man Cave / She Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Man Cave / She Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Man Cave / She Shed spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Man Cave / She Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday man cave / she shed
Everyday man cave / she shed
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a man cave / she shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWman cave / she shed + seasonal storage
man cave / she shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Man Cave / She Shed — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$264/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 man cave / she shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $264/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Man Cave / She Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Man Cave / She Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Man Cave / She Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Man Cave / She Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Man Cave / She Shed also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🌾 25×40

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

25×40 equestrian arena / tack room configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equestrian Arena / Tack Room →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Man Cave / She Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 man cave / she shed cost?

A 25×40 man cave / she shed from Steel and Stud starts at $12,650 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $264/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 man cave / she shed price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud man cave / she shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 man cave / she shed?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud man cave / she shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 man cave / she shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 man cave / she shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 man cave / she shed without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $264/month on a 25×40 man cave / she shed.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 man cave / she shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 man cave / she shed in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 25×40 man cave / she shed for year-round use?

Yes — Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a man cave / she shed to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Man Cave / She Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$12,650.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room | Steel and Stud — From $13,300
12
25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,150$13,300SAVE $1,850
or $277/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Equestrian Arena / Tack Room
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room, built for farm and ranch demands.

High roof clearance for mounted riders, reinforced flooring for hooves, oversized roll-up doors. Store tack, hay, feed, and groom horses under one all-steel roof.

You're viewing:Equestrian Arena / Tack Room·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,300$15,150Save $1,850
or as low as $277/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$13,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Up to 20 Tall
  • Ventilation
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-EQUESTRIAN-ARENABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your arena support building.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Dutch door + gable vents for airflow. High roof clearance for mounted riders, reinforced flooring for hooves, oversized roll-up doors.

Tack + saddle wallFEED + SUPPLIESGrooming / cross-tie bay25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · arena support building

Tack + saddle wall · Feed + supplies · Grooming / cross-tie bay

Tack + saddle wall at the front, feed + supplies in the middle, grooming / cross-tie bay at the rear. Capacity: supports an outdoor arena. Store tack, hay, feed, and groom horses under one all-steel roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: saddle racks, wash rough-in.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equestrian Arena / Tack Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equestrian Arena / Tack Room.

DAILY USEEveryday equestrian arena / tack room
Everyday equestrian arena / tack room
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equestrian arena / tack room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequestrian arena / tack room + seasonal storage
equestrian arena / tack room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$277/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $277/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equestrian Arena / Tack Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equestrian Arena / Tack Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equestrian Arena / Tack Room also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room cost?

A 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room from Steel and Stud starts at $13,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $277/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equestrian arena / tack room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equestrian arena / tack room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $277/month on a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equestrian Arena / Tack Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check

25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

1,000 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

25′ x 40′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 25×40 steel building delivers 1,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room | Steel and Stud — From $13,300
12
25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$15,150$13,300SAVE $1,850
or $277/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings25×40Equestrian Arena / Tack Room
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room, built for farm and ranch demands.

High roof clearance for mounted riders, reinforced flooring for hooves, oversized roll-up doors. Store tack, hay, feed, and groom horses under one all-steel roof.

You're viewing:Equestrian Arena / Tack Room·Size25×40·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$13,300$15,150Save $1,850
or as low as $277/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 25×40
25×40
this size
$13,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Up to 20 Tall
  • Ventilation
  • Heavy Duty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-25X40-EQUESTRIAN-ARENABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your arena support building.

25 feet wide × 40 feet long. Dutch door + gable vents for airflow. High roof clearance for mounted riders, reinforced flooring for hooves, oversized roll-up doors.

Tack + saddle wallFEED + SUPPLIESGrooming / cross-tie bay25′ × 40′ · 1,000 sq ft · arena support building

Tack + saddle wall · Feed + supplies · Grooming / cross-tie bay

Tack + saddle wall at the front, feed + supplies in the middle, grooming / cross-tie bay at the rear. Capacity: supports an outdoor arena. Store tack, hay, feed, and groom horses under one all-steel roof.

💡 Pro tip:Size affords: saddle racks, wash rough-in.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Equestrian Arena / Tack Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 25×40 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room spec sheet.

Width25'
Length40' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Equestrian Arena / Tack Room.

DAILY USEEveryday equestrian arena / tack room
Everyday equestrian arena / tack room
1,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a equestrian arena / tack room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWequestrian arena / tack room + seasonal storage
equestrian arena / tack room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room — what makes it different.

1,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$277/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $277/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 25×40?

1,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 25′ × 40′ footprint with 1,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,000–$12,000 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Equestrian Arena / Tack Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 25×40 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 25×40 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 25×40 Equestrian Arena / Tack Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Equestrian Arena / Tack Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
26×41×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,500+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Equestrian Arena / Tack Room also viewed:

🏡 25×40

Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage)

25×40 metal garage (3 cars + storage) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Garage (3 Cars + Storage) →
🏡 25×40

Workshop / Hobby Space

25×40 workshop / hobby space configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Workshop / Hobby Space →
🏡 25×40

Metal Carport (Open)

25×40 metal carport (open) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Carport (Open) →
🏢 25×40

Commercial Steel Building

25×40 commercial steel building configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Commercial Steel Building →
🏡 25×40

RV Cover / Boat Storage

25×40 rv cover / boat storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover / Boat Storage →
🎯 25×40

Home Gym / Studio

25×40 home gym / studio configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Home Gym / Studio →
🌾 25×40

Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch)

25×40 metal barn (farm & ranch) configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$13,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Metal Barn (Farm & Ranch) →
🎯 25×40

Man Cave / She Shed

25×40 man cave / she shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$12,650Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Man Cave / She Shed →
🏭 25×40

Factory / Warehouse

25×40 factory / warehouse configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Factory / Warehouse →
🏛️ 25×40

Government / Institutional

25×40 government / institutional configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Government / Institutional →
🏛️ 25×40

Houses of Worship

25×40 houses of worship configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$14,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Houses of Worship →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Equestrian Arena / Tack Room questions, answered.

How much does a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room cost?

A 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room from Steel and Stud starts at $13,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $277/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud equestrian arena / tack room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room?

Almost always for 1,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud equestrian arena / tack room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $277/month on a 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room.

What warranty comes with the 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 25×40 equestrian arena / tack room stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Equestrian Arena / Tack Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$13,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Three-Car Detached Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners on standard suburban lots use the 20×70 as a deep three-car detached garage with a shop bay at the back. You'll fit three full-size trucks bumper-to-bumper or two SUVs plus 25 feet of dedicated workshop. Most.

You're viewing:Three-Car Detached Garage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-THREE-CAR-DETACHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Homeowners on standard suburban lots use the 20×70 as a deep three-car detached garage with a shop bay at the back.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. You'll fit three full-size trucks bumper-to-bumper or two SUVs plus 25 feet of dedicated workshop.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Three-Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Three-Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Three-Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday three-car detached garage
Everyday three-car detached garage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a three-car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWthree-car detached garage + seasonal storage
three-car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 three-car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Three-Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Three-Car Detached Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Three-Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Three-Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 three-car detached garage cost?

A 20×70 three-car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 three-car detached garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud three-car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 three-car detached garage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud three-car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 three-car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 three-car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 three-car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 three-car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 three-car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 three-car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 three-car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 three-car detached garage typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Three-Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
20x70 metal building: side elevation showing height and roof line, 1,400 sq ft Steel and Stud factory direct

20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage

1,400 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

20′ x 70′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 20×70 steel building delivers 1,400 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage | Steel and Stud — From $19,200
12
20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,900$19,200SAVE $2,700
or $400/mo · $0 down · no credit check
HomeMetal Buildings20×70Three-Car Detached Garage
★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Homeowners on standard suburban lots use the 20×70 as a deep three-car detached garage with a shop bay at the back. You'll fit three full-size trucks bumper-to-bumper or two SUVs plus 25 feet of dedicated workshop. Most.

You're viewing:Three-Car Detached Garage·Size20×70·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$19,200$21,900Save $2,700
or as low as $400/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You'll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request — no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 20×70
20×70
this size
$19,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7'
8'
9'
10' +$340
12' +$640
14' +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray
🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️
Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪
Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟
Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶
Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️
Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩
Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋
Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness
Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method
Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,400 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-20X70-THREE-CAR-DETACHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We've provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your multi-bay garage + shop.

20 feet wide × 70 feet long. Engineered for clear-span over multiple doors. Homeowners on standard suburban lots use the 20×70 as a deep three-car detached garage with a shop bay at the back.

2 vehicle baysWorkshop areaStorage + lift bay20′ × 70′ · 1,400 sq ft · multi-bay garage + shop

2 vehicle bays · Workshop area · Storage + lift bay

2 vehicle bays at the front, workshop area in the middle, storage + lift bay at the rear. Capacity: 2 vehicles + full hobby shop. You'll fit three full-size trucks bumper-to-bumper or two SUVs plus 25 feet of dedicated workshop.

💡 Pro tip:Free Install. Size affords: 2-post lift, separated workshop, office.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer — drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim — mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote — what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
— or —
📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)
WHAT'S INCLUDED

Everything in your Three-Car Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,400 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 20×70 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Three-Car Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width20'
Length70' + 6" overhang
Side height9' standard
Floor space1,400 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Three-Car Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday three-car detached garage
Everyday three-car detached garage
1,400 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a three-car detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWthree-car detached garage + seasonal storage
three-car detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.
FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage — what makes it different.

1,400sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$400/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 20×70 three-car detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use — not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install — really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all — fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $400/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 20×70?

1,400 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial — fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 20′ × 70′ footprint with 1,400 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $11,200–$16,800 added home value
PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Three-Car Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 20×70 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes — free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What's the typical lead time for a 20×70 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month's payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What's covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud's 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 20×70 Three-Car Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review
HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day — usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Three-Car Detached Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →
Bundle & Save
🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
21×71×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$6,300+ Add
Most Added
🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Three-Car Detached Garage also viewed:

🎯 20×70

RV Cover with Storage

20×70 rv cover with storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize RV Cover with Storage →
🏢 20×70

Contractor Workshop

20×70 contractor workshop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Contractor Workshop →
🌾 20×70

Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms

20×70 equipment shed for hobby farms configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Equipment Shed for Hobby Farms →
🏡 20×70

Boat & Trailer Storage

20×70 boat & trailer storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Boat & Trailer Storage →
🏢 20×70

Auto Repair Shop

20×70 auto repair shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Auto Repair Shop →
🏡 20×70

Barndominium Shell

20×70 barndominium shell configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Barndominium Shell →
🏢 20×70

Side-by-Side Carport

20×70 side-by-side carport configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,050Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Side-by-Side Carport →
🌾 20×70

Horse Run-In Shed

20×70 horse run-in shed configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,850Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Horse Run-In Shed →
🎯 20×70

Hangar-Style Hobby Shop

20×70 hangar-style hobby shop configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$19,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Hangar-Style Hobby Shop →
🏭 20×70

Warehouse / Inventory Storage

20×70 warehouse / inventory storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Warehouse / Inventory Storage →
🏛️ 20×70

Community / Fire-Rescue Storage

20×70 community / fire-rescue storage configuration — free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$21,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty
Customize Community / Fire-Rescue Storage →
FREQUENTLY ASKED

Three-Car Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 20×70 three-car detached garage cost?

A 20×70 three-car detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $19,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $400/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 20×70 three-car detached garage price?

Yes — every Steel and Stud three-car detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 20×70 three-car detached garage?

Almost always for 1,400+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud three-car detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates — no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 20×70 three-car detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don't already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 20×70 three-car detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available — call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 20×70 three-car detached garage without a credit check?

Yes — Steel and Stud's rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month's payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $400/month on a 20×70 three-car detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 20×70 three-car detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 20×70 three-car detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes — our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 20×70 three-car detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 20×70 three-car detached garage typically adds $11,200–$16,800 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud's 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Three-Car Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We'll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$19,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

Need a custom size?

Order custom metal buildings in any width and length through Steel And Stud. Request metal building pricing or start your steel building design in 3D.

Instant Estimate

Commercial Metal Buildings Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Work With Steel And Stud

Your Commercial Metal Building Dealer and Steel Building Contractor

Steel And Stud is a full-service commercial building contractor and metal building dealer. From metal building pricing and steel building design to professional steel building installation, we manage your entire project. One point of contact, one fixed price.

🏭

Clear-Span Steel Structures for Commercial Use

Column-free interiors from 30 to 100+ feet wide. Steel structures for commercial properties including warehouses, retail showrooms, truck bays, racking systems and open floor plans for any business application.

📑

Permit-Ready Engineered Plans

Every commercial building order includes state-specific stamped drawings and foundation calculations engineered to your local building code. Submit directly to your permit office.

🚀

Fast Project Completion

Most Steel And Stud commercial metal building projects go from order to operational in 4 to 12 weeks. On-site installation typically takes 1 to 5 days with our certified contractor crews.

🛡

Durable Commercial-Grade Steel

Galvanized steel framing with 20-year structural warranty on 12-gauge. Powder-coated panels in 17 colors resist rust, fire and termites. Built for decades of commercial use.

💰

Dealer-Direct Metal Building Pricing

As your dedicated Steel And Stud dealer, you get metal building pricing without middleman markups. Commercial building packages priced 30 to 50% below traditional metal building construction costs. Request pricing anytime.

🎯

Custom Steel Building Design Options

Choose any width and length to order custom metal buildings sized to your project. Add roll-up doors, walk-in entries, storefront windows, insulation, lean-tos, mezzanines and wainscot finishes. Complete steel building design flexibility from your Steel And Stud dealer.

Compare Commercial Building Packages

Standard vs Deluxe vs Custom Commercial Buildings

Steel And Stud offers three commercial building packages. Compare metal building pricing, included features and steel building design options below. Choose the right package, then request a quote from your Steel And Stud dealer.

 

Standard Commercial

Starting from $26,485 installed

Vertical roof and wall panels
14-gauge or 12-gauge galvanized steel framing
Eave heights from 12 to 16 feet
Free delivery and professional installation included
Wainscot available as upgrade

Custom Commercial

Any size, quote-based

Any width and length based on project needs
Eave heights up to 24 feet, custom roof pitch
Red iron I-beam framing for wide clear spans
Lean-tos, mezzanines, dock access and custom layouts
Steel And Stud provides quotes within 24 hours
Customer Reviews

What Business Owners Say About Steel And Stud

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Commercial Metal Buildings.

★★★★★
4.8 / 5.0 from 2,847 verified reviews
★★★★★

"I needed a large, tall carport to protect my camping trailer in the Texas Panhandle. Bill was patient and very thorough. Three years later, after 80 mph winds collapsed it, Bill stayed in touch the whole way through the rebuild — even after warranty. No one is more customer-friendly."

RM
Ricardo M.
Phoenix, AZ
60x60x16 Commercial Building
★★★★★

"Bill is a hard charger when it comes to customer service. I was amazed how quickly he returned my emails and phone calls, and followed up with the installation from start to finish. Highly recommend."

DK
Diane K.
Charlotte, NC
40x100x14 Commercial Warehouse
★★★★☆

"Steel And Stud helped us plan and install a 50x50x16 Deluxe commercial building for our retail showroom. The wainscot and premium trim give it a professional look that impresses customers. Storefront windows and entry doors were pre-framed at the design stage so installation went smoothly. Looks like a project that cost twice what we paid."

TS
Trevor S.
Boise, ID
50x50x16 Deluxe Commercial Building
Frequently Asked Questions

Commercial Metal Building Buyer FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Steel And Stud commercial metal building pricing starts from $26,485 installed for a 36x40x14 Standard package. Mid-range options like the 40x100x14 warehouse start from $54,890. Deluxe commercial buildings with wainscot start from $36,825. All prices shown are starting estimates and may vary based on your location, building codes, customization and project specifications. Final pricing is provided in your written quote. Custom sizes in any width and length are available.

Yes. Steel And Stud provides commercial metal buildings in any custom width and length based on your project requirements. Widths range from 20 to over 100 feet. Lengths extend up to 300 feet. Eave heights are configurable from 12 to 24 feet. Choose from the pre-configured sizes on this page or share your custom dimensions and a Steel And Stud specialist will quote it within 24 hours.

Steel And Stud is a full-service commercial metal building dealer and steel building contractor. We partner with trusted production facilities to source pre-engineered steel buildings, then manage your entire project from planning and customization through delivery and professional steel building installation. This dealer-contractor approach gives you one point of contact from metal building pricing to completed metal building construction.

Yes. Steel And Stud is both a metal building dealer and a steel building contractor. Our certified crews handle professional steel building installation of commercial metal buildings across all 48 contiguous states. Most tubular steel buildings are installed in 1 to 5 days. Delivery and installation are included on standard orders.

Three ways to get metal building pricing and plan your project: (1) Submit a free quote request with your project details for a written commercial steel building quote within one business day. (2) Use the 3D building designer to configure steel building design options with live pricing. (3) Call 1-877-275-7048 to speak with a Steel And Stud dealer specialist.

Steel And Stud offers commercial metal buildings in any size. Pre-configured packages include 36x40, 40x50, 40x100, 50x50 and 60x60 in both Standard and Deluxe series. Custom sizes are available in any width from 20 to 100+ feet and any length up to 300 feet, with eave heights from 12 to 24 feet. There are no fixed size limitations. Tell us your project dimensions and we will price it.

Steel And Stud provides metal buildings for business use across every industry: metal warehouse buildings, commercial storage buildings, metal shop buildings for auto and truck repair, metal retail buildings, steel office buildings, metal workshop buildings for fabrication, metal garage buildings, industrial metal buildings for manufacturing, and steel structures for commercial properties including fitness centers, churches, restaurants, aviation hangars and agricultural operations. Any business that needs a durable commercial metal structure can work with Steel And Stud as their dealer and steel building contractor.

Standard Commercial Buildings feature vertical roof and wall panels with base trim, available with eave heights from 12 to 16 feet. Best for warehouses, workshops, storage and back-of-house operations. Deluxe Commercial Buildings include two-tone wainscot, premium trim, extended eave heights and pre-framed openings for storefront windows. Best for retail, office, restaurant, fitness and customer-facing commercial spaces. Both series are available in any custom size.

Yes. Steel And Stud offers three payment options for commercial metal building projects: Standard payment with deposit at order and balance after installation, monthly financing starting from $109/mo with terms from 12 to 84 months, and rent-to-own starting from $89/mo with no credit check required.

Most Steel And Stud commercial metal building projects are completed in 4 to 12 weeks from order to operational. On-site installation by our contractor crews typically takes 1 to 5 days for tubular steel structures. Larger red iron projects may take longer based on engineering and production requirements.

Yes. Every Steel And Stud commercial steel building is engineered to meet the specific snow, wind and seismic requirements for your installation location. Each order includes stamped engineered drawings and foundation calculations ready for permit submission. Steel And Stud handles engineering as part of our full-service metal building construction and commercial building contractor support.

Get Your Free Quote

Request Commercial Metal Building Pricing

Looking for a metal building dealer near me or a commercial building contractor near me? Steel And Stud serves all 48 states. Share your project details and our commercial building contractor team will return a written quote with metal building pricing within one business day.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Commercial Metal Buildings From Steel And Stud

Steel And Stud is a full-service commercial metal building dealer and steel building contractor working with business owners across all 48 contiguous states. We help you scope the project, source the right pre-engineered steel building, customize the layout, manage engineering and permitting, and complete professional installation through certified contractor crews. The result is a single accountable partner from your first conversation through the final walk-through, instead of a chain of separate vendors managing different parts of the same job.

Custom Commercial Steel Buildings in Any Width and Length

Every commercial metal building Steel And Stud delivers is sized to the project, not pulled from a fixed catalog. Widths run from roughly 20 feet on tubular framing to over 100 feet on red iron I-beam, with lengths reaching 300 feet and eave heights set anywhere from 12 to 24 feet. The pre-configured options on this page (36x40, 40x50, 40x100, 50x50, 60x60 and Deluxe variants) are popular starting points, but if your operation needs a 45x80 metal warehouse building, a 38x140 distribution center, or a 55x55 steel office building with a 20-foot eave for a mezzanine, that is the size you order. Sizing decisions follow your floor plan, racking layout, vehicle clearance, equipment height and zoning requirements, not a preset list.

Commercial Applications We Build For

Steel And Stud commercial steel buildings serve a wide cross-section of business types. Warehouse operators and 3PL providers use clear-span metal warehouse buildings to maximize racking capacity and forklift movement. Auto and truck repair shops select tall-eave steel shop buildings with multi-bay roll-up doors that clear two-post lifts and service trucks. Retailers, dealerships and showroom operators choose Deluxe commercial buildings with wainscot and storefront window openings to project a polished, customer-facing exterior. Light manufacturers, fabrication shops and contractor yards run their operations out of metal workshop buildings sized for welding tables, machine tools and equipment staging.

Beyond those core uses, churches and event venues install wide clear-span steel structures for sanctuaries and fellowship halls; fitness operators and indoor sports facilities use tall-eave commercial buildings for courts, CrossFit boxes and batting cages; agricultural businesses build packing sheds and farm-retail commercial space; aviation operators install steel hangars for general aviation aircraft and helicopters; and self-storage developers partition long commercial buildings into rentable units. Whatever your business does inside the building, the building is engineered around it.

How to Get Pricing and Start Your Project

The fastest path to accurate metal building pricing is a written quote. Submit your approximate dimensions, intended use and installation address through the free quote form and a Steel And Stud commercial building specialist returns a detailed written quote within one business day. The quote reflects your specific width and length, eave height, framing gauge, door and window selections, insulation package, finish choices and the snow, wind and seismic requirements at your installation location. There is no obligation, no pressure, and you are free to compare and adjust before placing the order.

If you prefer to explore configurations visually first, the 3D building designer lets you set dimensions, add doors and windows, change finishes and see live pricing as you adjust. Or call 1-877-275-7048 to reach a specialist directly. However you start, the goal is project-level numbers fast enough to move on real timelines.

Standard, Deluxe and Custom Building Packages

Steel And Stud delivers three commercial building package tiers. Standard Commercial Buildings are the workhorse choice for warehouses, workshops, contractor yards, mini-storage and back-of-house operations where function takes priority over facade. They include vertical roof and wall panels, galvanized steel framing in 14-gauge or 12-gauge, eave heights from 12 to 16 feet, free delivery and professional installation, with starting prices from $26,485 installed.

Deluxe Commercial Buildings are designed for customer-facing applications where exterior appearance matters: retail stores, restaurants, professional offices, fitness centers, auto dealerships and worship halls. The Deluxe package adds a two-tone wainscot exterior, premium gable and corner trim, extended eave heights up to 18 feet and pre-framed openings ready for storefront windows, additional doors and ADA-compliant entries. Starting prices begin at $36,825 installed.

Custom Commercial Buildings cover everything the Standard and Deluxe packages do not. Red iron I-beam clear spans up to 100 feet, eave heights above 18 feet, mezzanine levels, lean-tos on multiple sides, dock-leveler-ready loading bays, custom roof pitches and specialized door layouts are quoted individually based on your engineering and site requirements. There is no dimension or feature Steel And Stud cannot accommodate as a custom project.

Steel Building Design and Configuration Options

Customization happens at the design stage, before your building enters production, so installation runs without surprises. Door options span sectional roll-up garage doors from 8x8 up to 16x16 for vehicle bays and equipment access, commercial walk-in doors for daily foot traffic, and storefront entry systems with pre-framed openings for customer-facing builds. Window openings can be placed on any wall and sized to match retail visibility, office natural light or warehouse ventilation needs. Insulation runs from R-13 for moderate climate buffering up to R-30 for fully conditioned commercial interiors with HVAC.

Beyond doors, windows and insulation, you can add lean-to canopies on any side for covered loading or outdoor work, mezzanine levels to add usable square footage without expanding the footprint, interior partition walls for offices or partitioned storage, dock-height openings for trailer loading, and pre-engineered HVAC penetrations. Exterior color is selected from 17 panel options, applied independently across roof, walls, trim and (on Deluxe builds) wainscot, so the finished commercial steel building reflects your brand or fits the surrounding architecture.

Engineering, Permitting and Code Compliance

Every commercial metal building Steel And Stud delivers is engineered for the specific snow, wind and seismic loads at your installation address, with stamped drawings and foundation calculations included in every order ready for permit submission. Engineering is handled in-house as part of standard service, so there is no need to hire a separate structural engineer or coordinate stamps from multiple parties. The package covers what your local building department requires for commercial permits, including ground snow load, basic wind speed, exposure category and seismic risk category specific to your zip code.

Professional Installation by Certified Steel And Stud Contractor Crews

Once the permit is approved and your site is prepared, Steel And Stud contractor crews arrive to complete the steel building installation on your schedule. Most tubular steel commercial buildings reach a weather-tight, fully erected state in one to five days on site, depending on dimensions and configuration. Larger red iron I-beam projects with custom features run longer based on span width, mezzanine work and specialized openings. The typical timeline from order placement to a fully operational commercial metal building is four to twelve weeks, against four to nine months for stick-built or block construction of equivalent square footage. You pay your deposit at order and the balance after the completed walk-through.

Commercial Metal Building Pricing and What Drives Cost

Pricing on a commercial metal building moves with the build. Two structures with the same dimensions can quote very differently once you factor in framing gauge, eave height, the snow and wind loads at the site, door and window count, insulation depth, finish package, lean-to additions, mezzanine work and any custom engineering. A 36x40x14 with three roll-up doors, a walk-in entry, R-19 insulation and a 14-foot lean-to is a different building from a 36x40x14 in base configuration, even though the dimensions match. Your written quote from Steel And Stud reflects the building you are actually ordering, with starting prices serving as a baseline rather than a final number.

Financing, Rent-to-Own and Section 179

Three payment paths are available for every commercial metal building project. Standard payment splits the total into a deposit at order and the balance after installation, which delivers the lowest total cost. Monthly financing starts from $109 per month with terms from 12 to 84 months and a soft credit pull. Rent-to-own starts from $89 per month, requires no credit check, and transfers ownership at the end of a 24 to 60 month term. Business buyers may also qualify for Section 179 deductions, which can allow a full first-year deduction on qualifying commercial metal building purchases.

Service Coverage Across All 48 States

Steel And Stud delivers and installs commercial metal buildings throughout the lower 48. Coverage extends to every state, but each project is engineered and permitted around the codes, snow and wind loads, and inspection processes of your specific installation address. Business owners working with a metal building dealer near them or hiring a commercial building contractor in their state get the same Steel And Stud team and the same dealer-direct pricing, with a project specialist who knows the local permit office and matches the build to your jurisdiction.

Why Buyers Choose Steel And Stud

The dealer-contractor model condenses what would normally be three or four separate vendor relationships into one. Instead of negotiating with a manufacturer, contracting an erector, hiring a structural engineer and managing freight separately, you place a single order with Steel And Stud and receive an engineered, delivered, installed commercial steel building under one fixed quote. There is no general contractor markup added to the chain, no broker margin built into freight, and no finger-pointing between vendors when something needs adjusting. Steel And Stud has served commercial customers since 2004, holds an A+ BBB rating, and carries over 2,800 verified buyer reviews averaging 4.8 stars across project sizes from small workshops to multi-acre distribution facilities.

Start Your Commercial Steel Building Project Today

Ready to plan your project? Submit a free quote request, configure your build in the 3D designer, or call 1-877-275-7048. A Steel And Stud specialist will return your written commercial steel building quote within one business day, walk you through customization options, line up financing if needed, and schedule professional installation once the project is locked in.

Related Steel And Stud Building Categories

Outside of commercial metal buildings, Steel And Stud also operates as a dealer and contractor for residential and agricultural structures including steel garages, metal barns, metal carports, RV covers and barndominiums. Steel building materials such as purlins, girts, standing seam roofing and insulated metal panels are also available for self-build and material-only projects.

Buy Commercial Metal Buildings From Steel And Stud

Dealer-direct metal building pricing starting from $26,485 installed. All prices are starting estimates. Custom sizes in any width and length. Professional steel building installation by our commercial building contractor team across 48 states. Get a free quote or call your nearest Steel And Stud commercial building contractor to plan your project today.

View Cart